projector px803ul-wh/px803ul-bk · if you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands...

212
Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK User’s Manual Model No. NP-PX803UL-WH/NP-PX803UL-BK

Upload: others

Post on 01-Nov-2020

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

Projector

PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BKUser’s Manual

Model No.NP-PX803UL-WH/NP-PX803UL-BK

Page 2: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

Ver. 1 11/15

• Apple,Mac,MacOS,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista, InternetExplorer, .NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.

• Adobe,AdobePDF,AdobeReader,andAcrobatareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.

• HDMI,theHDMILogoandHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMILicensingLLC.

• DisplayPortandDisplayPortComplianceLogoaretrademarksownedbytheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssocia-tion.

• HDBaseT™isatrademarkofHDBaseTAlliance.

• DLPandBrilliantColoraretrademarksofTexasInstruments.

• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandothercountriesandareas.

• Wi-Fi®,Wi-FiAlliance®,andWi-FiProtectedAccess(WPA,WPA2)®areregisteredtrademarksoftheWi-FiAlliance.

• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation

• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• EthernetiseitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofFujiXeroxCo.,Ltd.

• ExtronandXTPareregisteredtrademarksofRGBSystems,Inc.intheUnitedStates.

• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectiveholders.

• TOPPERSSoftwareLicenses

TheproductincludessoftwarelicensedunderTOPPERSLicense.

Formoreinformationoneachsoftware,see“readme.pdf”insidethe“aboutTOPPERS”folderonthesuppliedCD-ROM.

NOTES(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.

(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionablepoints,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.

(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprofitorothermattersdeemedtoresultfromusingtheProjector.

Page 3: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

i

Important InformationSafety CautionsPrecautionsPleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.

CAUTIONToturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasilyaccessible.

CAUTIONTOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.

Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectricalshock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.

Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthisunithasbeenprovided.Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.

WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)ThisClassAdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES-003.

Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.

Disposing of your used product

EU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludesprojectorsandtheirelectricalaccessories.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowtheguidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpusreducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpacttothehumanhealthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMemberStates.

For EU:Thecrossed-outwheeledbinimpliesthatusedbatteriesshouldnotbeputtothegeneralhouseholdwaste!Thereisaseparatecollectionsystemforusedbatteries,toallowpropertreatmentandrecyclinginaccordancewithlegislation.

According the EU directive 2006/66/EC, the battery can’t be disposed improperly. The battery shall be sepa-rated to collect by local service.

Page 4: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

ii

Important Information

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.

RF Interference

WARNINGThisisaClassAproduct.Inadomesticenvironmentthisproductmaycauseradiointerferenceinwhichcasetheusermayberequiredtotakeadequatemeasures.CAUTION• Inordertoreduceanyinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreceptionuseasignalcablewithferritecoreattached.Useofsignalcableswithoutaferritecoreattachedmaycauseinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreception.• ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassAdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferencewhentheequipmentisoperatedinacommercialenvironment.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradi-ateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstallationmanual,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.Operationofthisequipmentinaresidentialareaislikelytocauseharmfulinterferenceinwhichcasetheuserwillberequiredtocorrecttheinterferenceathisownexpense.

ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(fiveAmps)fuseinstalledforusewiththisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.

Important SafeguardsThesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventfireandshock.Pleasereadthemcarefullyandheedallwarnings.

WARNING• Whentheprojectorisdamaged,coolingfluidsmaycomeoutofinternalpart. Shouldthishappen,immediatelyturnofftheACsupplytotheprojectorandcontactyourdealer. DONOTtouchanddrinkthecoolingfluid.Whenthecoolingfluidsareswallowedorcontactedwithyoureyes,pleaseconsultmedicalattentionimmediately.Ifyoutouchthecoolingfluidwithyourhand,rinseyourhandswellunderrunningwater.

Installation• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.• Donotinstallandstoretheprojectorinthebelowcircumstances.Failuretodosomaycauseofmalfunction.- Inpowerfulmagneticfields- Incorrosivegasenvironment- Outdoors• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.- Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Page 5: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

iii

Important Information

WARNING• Donotuseanyotherobjectthantheprojector’slenscovertocoverthelenswhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocancausetheobjecttogetextremelyhot,andpossiblyresultinginafireordamageduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.

Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledanyanglewithinverticalandhorizontal360°range,however,lifeofopticalpartswillbeshorteninthefollowinginstallationstate:• Whentheprojectorisinstalledonwhichlensfacesdownward.• Whentheintakeventontheprojectorsidefacesdownwardintheportraitinstallation.(→page154)Forportraitinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakeventatthebottom.Observeprecautionsforportraitinstallation.* Acustomizedstandisrequiredtobeattachedtotheprojector.(→page155)

Fire and Shock Precautions • Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyourprojector.Allowenoughspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pagexi)• Donottrytotouchtheexhaustventontherearside(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojectoristurnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation. Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieveanyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyourprojector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnel.• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorfire.• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupplyfitsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.• Donotlookintothelightsourceusingopticalinstruments(suchasmagnifyingglassesandmirrors).Visualimpair-mentcouldresult.• Whenturningontheprojector,ensurethatnobodyisfacingtowardsthelensinthepathofthelightemittedfromthelaser.

• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthelensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancauseanunpredictableoutcomesuchasafireorinjurytotheeyes.• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent. Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheexhaustvent.

Page 6: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

iv

Important Information

• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorfire.- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.- Donotheatthepowercord.- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingconditions:- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinet.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.• WhenusingaLANcable: Forsafety,donotconnecttotheterminalforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.•Donotusethemalfunctionedprojector.Itmaycauseofnotonlyelectricshockorfirebutalsoseriousdamagetoyoureyesight.• Donotletchildrentooperatetheprojectorbythemselves.Iftheprojectorisoperatedbychildren,adultsneedtoattendandkeeptheireyesonchildren.• Ifdamageormalfunctionoftheprojectorisfound,immediatelystoptouseitandconsultyourdealerforrepair.• Neverdisassemble,repair,andremodelbyendusers.Iftheseareperformedbyendusers,itmaycauseofseriousproblemonusers’safety.• Consultyourdealerfordisposingtheprojector.Neverdisassembletheprojectorbeforedisposingit.

CAUTION• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.• Donotsendtheprojectorinthesoftcasebyparceldeliveryserviceorcargoshipment.Theprojectorinsidethesoftcasecouldbedamaged.• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[MODE]→[HIGH].)• Donotunplugthepowercordfromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.DoingsocancausedamagetotheACINterminaloftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercord. ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.• Whenmovingtheprojector,makesureyouhaveatleasttwopeople.Attemptingtomovetheprojectoralonecouldresultinbackpainorotherinjuries.

Caution on Handling the Optional LensWhenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcaptothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdamagecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.Donotholdthelenspartwhencarryingtheprojector.Doingsocouldcausethefocusringtorotate,resultinginaccidentaldroppingoftheprojector.Formounting,replacing,andcleaningthelens,makesuretopowerofftheprojectoranddisconnectthepowercord.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.

Page 7: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

v

Important Information

Precautions when installing or replacing the lens unit sold separately (LENS CALIBRATION) Afterinstallingorreplacingthelensunit,presseithertheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbuttononthemainunitortheINFO/L-CALIB.buttonwhilepressingtheCTLbuttonontheremotecontroltocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION].(→ page18,118)Bycarryingout[LENSCALIBRATION],theadjustmentrangeofthezoom,focus,andshiftofthe[LENSMEMORY]iscalibrated.Contactyourdealertoinstallandreplacethelensunit.

Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Light Module1. Alightmodulecontainingmultiplelaserdiodesisequippedintheproductasthelightsource.2. Theselaserdiodesaresealedinthelightmodule.Nomaintenanceorserviceisrequiredfortheperformanceofthelightmodule.

3. Enduserisnotallowedtoreplacethelightmodule.4. Contactqualifieddistributorforlightmodulereplacementandfurtherinformation.

Laser Safety Caution• ThisproductisclassifiedasClass1ofIEC60825-1Thirdedition2014-05. ThisproductisclassifiedasClass3RofIEC60825-1Secondedition2007-03. AlsocomplieswithFDAperformancestandards21CFR1040.10and1040.11forlaserproductsexceptfordevia-tionspursuanttoLaserNoticeNo.50,datedJune24,2007. Obeythelawsandregulationsofyourcountryinrelationtotheinstallationandmanagementofthedevice.• Bluelaserdiodes:Wavelength450–460nm.• Pulsewidth&repetitionrate:0.74ms,240Hz• Outputpower:240W• Thelasermoduleisequippedinthisproduct. Useofcontrolsoradjustmentsofproceduresotherthanthosespecifiedhereinmayresultinhazardousradiationexposure.

CAUTION

• Useofcontrolsoradjustmentsorperformanceofproceduresotherthanthosespecifiedhereinmayresultinhazardousradiationexposure.

CAUTION – CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCTLASERLIGHT–AVOIDDIRECTEYEEXPOSURE

Page 8: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

vi

Important Information

Applicablelensunit:NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL/NP31ZL

HorizontalangleH

Lens ZoomTele Wide

NP16FL — 32.9NP17ZL 15.5 21.7NP18ZL 12.4 16.1NP19ZL 7.7 12.7NP20ZL 5.3 7.9NP21ZL 3.4 5.4NP31ZL 27.8 33.6

VerticalangleV

Lens ZoomTele Wide

NP16FL — 22.0NP17ZL 9.8 14.0NP18ZL 7.8 10.2NP19ZL 4.8 8.0NP20ZL 3.3 5.0NP21ZL 2.1 3.4NP31ZL 18.2 22.5

H

H

V

V

Applicablelensunit:NP39ML

HorizontalangleH

Lens ZoomTele Wide

NP39ML — 52.8

VerticalangleV

Lens ZoomTele Wide

V1 V2NP39ML — 9.68 21.52

H

H

V1

V2

Page 9: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

vii

Important Information

• ThecautionlabelandtheexplanatorylabelsoftheCLASS3RLASERPRODUCTSarestuckonthebelowindicatedpositions.

Label1

Label2 Label3

Label 3

Label 1

Label 2

Page 10: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

viii

Important Information

• Manufacturer'sIDLabel

(ForPX803UL-WH)

(ForPX803UL-BK)

PositionoftheManufacturer'sIDLabel

Page 11: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

ix

Important Information

About Copyright of original projected pictures:Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenuesuchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.

Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish marketEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirectfieldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreflec-tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirectfieldofview.

Page 12: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

x

Important Information

Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Beforeviewing,besuretoreadhealthcareprecautionsthatmaybefoundintheuser’smanualincludedwithyour3Deyeglassesoryour3DcompatiblecontentsuchasBlu-rayDiscs,videogames,computer’svideofilesandthelike.Toavoidanyadversesymptoms,heedthefollowing:• Donotuse3Deyeglassesforviewinganymaterialotherthan3Dimages.• Allowadistanceof2m/7feetorgreaterbetweenthescreenandauser.Viewing3Dimagesfromtoocloseadistancecanstrainyoureyes.• Avoidviewing3Dimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.Takeabreakof15minutesorlongeraftereveryhourofviewing.• Ifyouoranymemberofyourfamilyhasahistoryoflight-sensitiveseizures,consultadoctorbeforeviewing3Dimages.• Whileviewing3Dimages,ifyougetsicksuchasnausea,dizziness,queasiness,headache,eyestrain,blurryvision,convulsions,andnumbness,stopviewingthem.Ifsymptomsstillpersist,consultadoctor.• View3Dimagesfromthefrontofthescreen.Viewingfromananglemaycausefatigueoreyestrain.

Power management functionInordertokeeppowerconsumptionlow,thefollowingpowermanagementfunctions(1)and(2)havebeensetwhenshippedfromthefactory.Pleasedisplaytheon-screenmenuandchangethesettings(1)and(2)accordingtotheaimofusingtheprojector.

1. STANDBY MODE (Factory preset: NORMAL)

• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillnotwork:

HDMIOUTterminal,Ethernet/HDBaseTPort,USBPort,LANfunctions,MailAlertfunction

(→page134)

2. AUTO POWER OFF (Factory preset: 1 hour)

• When[1:00]isselectedfor[AUTOPOWEROFF],youcanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoffin1hourifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

(→page135)

Page 13: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

xi

Important Information

Clearance for Installing the ProjectorAllowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.Thehightemperatureexhaustcomingoutofthedevicemaybesuckedintothedeviceagain.AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector’sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.• Concerningtotheportraitprojection,pleaserefer“Portraitprojection”onpage154.

Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.

30cm/11.8"orgreater 30cm/11.8"orgreater

Intakevent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front, back and top of the projector.

Example 2 – If there is a wall behind the projector.

50cm/19.7"orgreater

Lens

Exhaustvent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the right, left, and top of the projector.

Page 14: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

xii

Table of ContentsImportant Information ............................................................................................ i

1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1❶What’sintheBox? ..........................................................................................................1❷IntroductiontotheProjector ...........................................................................................3

CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ..................................................3General .....................................................................................................................3Lightsource·Brightness ..........................................................................................3Installation .................................................................................................................3Videos .......................................................................................................................4Network .....................................................................................................................4Energy-saving ...........................................................................................................4Aboutthisuser’smanual ...........................................................................................5

❸PartNamesoftheProjector ...........................................................................................6Front/Top ...................................................................................................................6Rear ..........................................................................................................................7Controls/IndicatorPanel ............................................................................................8TerminalsFeatures ...................................................................................................9

❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ..............................................................................10BatteryInstallation ..................................................................................................11RemoteControlPrecautions ...................................................................................11OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl .......................................................12UsingtheRemoteControlinWiredOperation ........................................................12

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................13❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................13❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ..............................................14

UsingtheSuppliedPowerCords ............................................................................15UsingthePowerCordStopper ...............................................................................16

❸TurningontheProjector ...............................................................................................17PerformingLensCalibration ...................................................................................18NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) .......................................19

❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................20Selectingthecomputerorvideosource..................................................................20

❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................22Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................23Focus ......................................................................................................................26Zoom .......................................................................................................................31AdjustingtheTiltFoot .............................................................................................32

❻OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ..................................................................33AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust ...................................................................33

❼TurningofftheProjector ...............................................................................................34❽AfterUse.......................................................................................................................35

3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................36❶Turnoffthelightoftheprojector(LENSSHUTTER) ....................................................36❷TurningofftheImage ....................................................................................................36❸TurningOfftheOn-ScreenMenu(On-ScreenMute) ....................................................36

Page 15: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

xiii

Table of Contents

❹FreezingaPicture ........................................................................................................37❺MagnifyingaPicture .....................................................................................................38❻ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE

[LIGHTMODE]........................................................................................................39CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ..............................................41

❼CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] .................42❽PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ..................................45❾Projecting3Dvideos.....................................................................................................48

Proceduretowatch3Dvideosusingthisprojector .................................................48Whenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D .....................................................................51

❿ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ..................................................52⓫StoringChangesforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus[LENSMEMORY] .........................58

Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]: .......................................59Tocallupyouradjustedvaluesfrom[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ................................61

4. Multi-Screen Projection ...............................................................................64❶Thingsthatcanbedoneusingmulti-screenprojection ................................................64

Case1.Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideos[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] .........................................................................................................64Case2.Usingfourprojectors(resolution:WUXGA)toprojectvideoswitharesolutionof2560×1600pixels[TILING]...............................................................65Thingstonotewheninstallingprojectors ................................................................67

❷DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime ...................................................................68Projectingtwoscreens ............................................................................................69Switchingthemaindisplaywiththesub-displayandviceversa .............................70Restrictions .............................................................................................................71

❸DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING] ...........................................................72Settingtheoverlapofprojectionscreens ................................................................73BlackLevelAdjustment ...........................................................................................76

5. Using On-Screen Menu .................................................................................78❶UsingtheMenus ...........................................................................................................78❷MenuElements .............................................................................................................79❸ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................80❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[INPUT] ......................................................................86

HDMI .......................................................................................................................86DisplayPort ..............................................................................................................86BNC ........................................................................................................................86BNC(CV) .................................................................................................................86BNC(Y/C) ................................................................................................................86COMPUTER ...........................................................................................................86HDBaseT ................................................................................................................86SLOT .......................................................................................................................86ENTRYLIST ...........................................................................................................86TESTPATTERN ......................................................................................................86

❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................90[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................90[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................94[VIDEO] ...................................................................................................................98

Page 16: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

xiv

Table of Contents

[3DSETTINGS] ....................................................................................................100UsingtheLensMemoryFunction[LENSMEMORY] ............................................101

❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[DISPLAY] ................................................................103[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] ...............................................................................103[GEOMETRICCORRECTION] .............................................................................105[EDGEBLENDING] ..............................................................................................109[MULTISCREEN]..................................................................................................110

❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] ...................................................................112[MENU] .................................................................................................................112[INSTALLATION(1)] ...............................................................................................114[INSTALLATION(2)] ...............................................................................................117[CONTROL] ..........................................................................................................119[NETWORKSETTINGS] .......................................................................................127[SOURCEOPTIONS] ...........................................................................................132[POWEROPTIONS] .............................................................................................134ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ..................................................................136

❽MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .....................................................................137[USAGETIME] ......................................................................................................137[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................137[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................138[SOURCE(3)] ........................................................................................................138[SOURCE(4)] ........................................................................................................138[WIREDLAN] ........................................................................................................139[VERSION(1)] .......................................................................................................139[OTHERS] .............................................................................................................139[HDBaseT] ............................................................................................................140

6. Connecting to Other Equipment ...........................................................141❶Mountingalens(soldseparately) ...............................................................................141

Mountingthelens..................................................................................................141Removingthelens ................................................................................................142

❷MakingConnections ...................................................................................................143AnalogRGBsignalconnection .............................................................................143DigitalRGBsignalconnection ..............................................................................144ConnectinganExternalMonitor ...........................................................................147ConnectingYourBlu-rayPlayerorOtherAVEquipment .......................................148ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................149ConnectingHDMIInput.........................................................................................150Connectingadocumentcamera ...........................................................................151ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ..................................................................................152ConnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice(soldcommercially) ....................153Portraitprojection(verticalorientation) .................................................................154Stackingprojectors ...............................................................................................156

7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................159❶CleaningtheLens.......................................................................................................159❷CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................159

8. User Supportware ..........................................................................................160❶OperatingEnvironmentforSoftwareIncludedonCD-ROM .......................................160

Page 17: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

xv

Table of Contents

NamesandFeaturesofBundledSoftwarePrograms ...........................................160Downloadservice .................................................................................................160

❷InstallingSoftwareProgram .......................................................................................161InstallationforWindowssoftware ..........................................................................161

❸OperatingtheProjectorViatheLAN(VirtualRemoteTool) ........................................164ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN. ............................................................................165

❹ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5) ........................167

9. Appendix ..............................................................................................................171❶Throwdistanceandscreensize .................................................................................171

Lenstypesandthrowdistance .............................................................................171Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions ................................................................173Lensshiftingrange ................................................................................................174

❷MountingtheOptionalBoard(soldseparately) ..........................................................175❸CompatibleInputSignalList .......................................................................................177❹Specifications .............................................................................................................180

PowerCord ...........................................................................................................183❺CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................184❻Pinassignmentsandsignalnamesofmainterminals ...............................................185❼Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................187

IndicatorMessages ...............................................................................................187CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................189Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ...............................191

❽PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................192❾TroubleshootingCheckList .........................................................................................193

Page 18: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

1

1. Introduction❶ What’s in the Box?Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.

Projector

Dustcapforlens* Theprojectorisshippedwithout

alens.Forthetypesoflensandthrowdistances,seepage171.

Remotecontrol(7N901041)

AAalkalinebatteries(x2)

Lenstheftpreventionscrew(79TM1071)Thisscrewmakesitdif-ficulttoremovethelensmountedontheprojec-tor.(→page142)

Powercord×3

(79TM1021) (79TQ1001forAC120V) (79TQ1011forAC200V)

ForEurope/Asia/SouthAmerica ForNorthAmerica

4Stackingholders(79TM1101)Whenstackingprojectors(doublestacking),thetiltfootoftheupperprojectorwillbeplacedontothesestackingholders.(→ page157)

For North America onlyLimitedwarrantyFor customers in Europe: YouwillfindourcurrentvalidGuar-anteePolicyonourWebSite:www.nec-display-solutions.com• ImportantInfomation

(7N8N6631)• QuickSetupGuide(7N8N6641)• SecuritySticker (Usethisstickerwhensecurity

passwordisseton.)

NECProjectorCD-ROMUser’smanual(PDF)andtheutilitysoftware(7N952341)

Page 19: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

2

1. Introduction

Attaching/Removing the Dust CapTo remove the dust cap from the projector, push thetongueatthetopleftoutwardandpulltheknobatthecenterofthecap.

Toattachthedustcaptotheprojector,locatethecatchonthelowerendofthedustcapandplaceitintotheopen-ingoftheprojectorwiththepointofatrianglemark(▽)facingdownward(①inthefigurebelow),andthenpushtheupperendof thedustcapagainst theprojector toplacethecatchesintotheslotwhileclutchingthehandle(②inthefigurebelow).

Page 20: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

3

1. Introduction

❷ Introduction to the ProjectorThissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the ProjectorThisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimagesupto500inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMaccomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,Blu-rayplayer,ordocumentcamera.Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*1.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.

*1 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.

Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.

Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

General

• Single-chipDLPprojectorwithhighresolutionandhighbrightness

Realizedtoprojecttheimageintheresolution1920×1200pixels(WUXGA),theaspectratioin16:10,andthebrightnessin8000lumens.

Light source · Brightness

• Along-lifelaserdiodeisequippedinthelightmodule

Theproductcanbeoperatedatlowcostbecausethelaserlightsourcecanbeusedforalongtimewithoutrequir-ingreplacementormaintenance.

• Brightnesscanbeadjustedwithinawiderange

Unlikewithordinarylightsources,thebrightnesscanbeadjustedfrom20to100%in1%increments.

• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode

Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetectandautomaticallyadjusttheoutput,therebymaintainingconstantbrightnessthroughoutthelifeofthelightmodule.

However,ifbrightnessoutputissetatthemaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse.

Installation

• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation

Thisprojectorsupports8typesofoptionallenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplacesofinstallationandprojectionmethods.

Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.

Notethatnolensismounteduponshipmentfromthefactory.Pleasepurchaseoptionallensesseparately.

• Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledanyanglewithinverticalandhorizontal360°range,however,lifeofopticalparts will be shorten in the following installation state:

• Whentheprojectorisinstalledonwhichlensfacesdownward.

• Whentheintakeventontheprojectorsidefacesdownwardintheportraitinstallation.(Seepage154)

• Doublestackableforhighlightoutputprojection

Bystacking2projectors,increasedbrightnessonalargescreenispossible.

• Powerlenscontrolforquickandeasyadjustment

Byusingbuttonsontheprojectorortheremotecontrol,zoom,focus,andposition(lensshift)canbeadjusted.

Page 21: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4

1. Introduction

Videos

• Widerangeofinput/outputterminals(HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,HDBaseT,etc.)andbuilt-inmonauralspeaker

Theprojector isequippedwithavarietyof input/outputterminals:HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC(5-core),computer(analog),HDBaseT,etc.

Theprojector’sHDMIinput/outputterminalsandDisplayPortinputterminalsupportHDCP.

HDBaseT,promotedandadvancedbytheHDBaseTAlliance,isaconsumerelectronic(CE)andcommercialcon-nectivitytechnology.

• Slotforoptionalboard

Thisprojectorhasaslotforoptionalboards(soldseparately).

• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)

Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.

Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”(PIP)inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthemainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”(PICTUREBYPICTURE)inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.

• Multi-screenprojectionusingmultipleprojectors

ThisprojectorisequippedwithmultipleHDMIinput&outputterminalsthatcanconnectmultipleprojectorsinadaisychain.Bydividingandprojectinghighresolutionimageoneachprojector,highqualityimagecanberealized.

Furthermore,theboundariesofthescreensaresmoothedusinganedgeblendingfunction.

• SupportsHDMI3Dformat

Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewearand3DemittersthatsupportXpand3D.

Network

• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)providedasstandard

ThethreeutilitysoftwarestoredintheenclosedNECProjectorCD-ROM(VirtualRemoteTool,PCControlUtilityPro4(forWindows)andPCControlUtilityPro5(forMacOS))canbeused.

• CRESTRONROOMVIEWcompatible

ThisprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEW,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedtothenetworktobeman-agedfromacomputerorcontroller.

Energy-saving

• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.27wattsorunder

Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“NORMAL”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodeis0.27wattsorunder.

0.18wattswithpowervoltageAC100V-130Vand0.27wattswithpowervoltageAC200V-240V.

• “LIGHTMODE”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display

Theprojectorisequippedwithan“LIGHTMODE”forreducingpowerconsumptionduringuse.Furthermore,thepower-savingeffectwhentheLIGHTMODEissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO2emissionsandthisisindicatedontheconfirmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”ontheon-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).

Page 22: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

5

1. Introduction

About this user’s manualThefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthefirsttime.Takeafewminutesnowtoreviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llfindanoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.

Page 23: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

6

1. Introduction

❸ Part Names of the ProjectorFront/TopThelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP18ZLlensismounted.

Lens

RemoteSensor(locatedonthefrontandtherear)

(→page12)

IndicatorPanel(→page8)

IntakeventTakesinairtocooltheunit.

(→pagexi,154)

RemoteSensor(→page12)

StackingHolderfixingsection(4locations)

IntakeventTakesinairtocooltheunit.(→pagexi,154)

TiltFoot(→page32)

LensRelease(LENS)Button(→page142)

LensCap(Thelenscapisattached

tothelens.)

Page 24: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

7

1. Introduction

Rear

ACINterminalConnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplughere,andplugtheotherendintoanactivewalloutlet.(→page14)

Theftpreventionscrewholeforthelensunit

MainpowerswitchWhileACpowerisbeingsupplied,setthemainpowerswitchtoONposition(|),thenyourprojectorwillenterastandbystate.

PowerCordStopper(→page16)

* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver®SecuritySystem.

Built-inSecuritySlot( )*

SecurityBarFixingatheftprevention

device.Thesecuritybaracceptssecuritywiresorchains

upto0.18inch/4.6mmindiameter.

Handle(locatedon4posi-tions)

Fortransportation

NOTE: • For moving the projector,

makesureyouhaveatleasttwopeople.Attemptingtomove the projector alonecould result in back pain or other injuries.

IntakeventTakesinairtocooltheunit.(→pagexi,154)

Terminals(→page9)

ExhaustventHeatedaiirisexhausted

fromhere.(→pagexi,154)

Controls(→page8)

Page 25: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

8

1. Introduction

Controls/Indicator Panel

10 11

5 4 3 2 161513 8

7

141716 9 12

1. (POWER)Button (→page17,34)

2. POWER Indicator (→page17,18,34,186)

3. STATUS Indicator (→page186)

4. LIGHT Indicator (→page39,187)

5. TEMP.Indicator (→page187)

6. SOURCEButton (→page20)

7. AUTOADJ.Button (→page33)

8. 3DREFORMButton (→page42)

9. MENUButton (→page78)

10. ▲▼◀▶Buttons (→page78)

11.ENTERButton (→page78)

12.EXITButton (→page78)

13.SHUTTER/CALIBRATIONButton (→page36)

14.LIGHTButton (→page39)

15.LENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONButton (→page23,58,174)

16.FOCUS+/−Button (→page26)

17.ZOOM+/−Button (→page31)

Page 26: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

9

1. Introduction

Terminals Features

9

101112

1 7

4

56

238

1314

1. COMPUTERIN(MiniD-Sub15Pin) (→page14,143,149,184)

2. DisplayPortINTerminal(DisplayPort20Pin) (→page144,184)

3. HDMIINTerminal(TypeA) (→page144,146,150,184)

4. BNCInput[R/Cr/CV,G/Y/Y,B/Cb/C,H,V]Termi-nals(BNC×5)

(→page143,148)

5. BNC(Y/C)InputTerminal(BNC×2) (→page148)

6. BNC(CV)InputTerminal(BNC×1) (→page148)

7. USBPort(TypeA) (→page185) (Forfutureexpansion.Thisportallowsforpowersup-ply.)

8. HDMIOUTTerminal(TypeA) (→page147)

9. Ethernet/HDBaseTPort(RJ-45) (→page152,153,185)

10.3DSYNCTerminal(MiniDIN3Pin) (→page50)

11.PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin) (→page185,191) Use this port to connect aPC or control system.Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunicationprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage191.

12.REMOTETerminal(StereoMini) Usethisjackforwiredremotecontroloftheprojectorusingacommerciallyavailableremotecablewith⌀3.5 stereomini-plug(withoutresistance).

Connecttheprojectorandthesuppliedremotecontrolusingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrolcable.

(→page12)

NOTE: • Whenaremotecontrolcable isconnectedtotheREMOTE

terminal,infraredremotecontroloperationscannotbeper-formed.

• PowercannotbesuppliedfromtheREMOTEterminaltotheremotecontrol.

• When [HDBaseT] is selected in the [REMOTE SENSOR]and theprojector isconnected toacommercially-availabletransmissiondevicethatsupportsHDBaseT,remotecontroloperationsininfra-redcannotbecarriedoutiftransmissionofremotecontrolsignalshasbeensetupinthetransmissiondevice.However,remotecontrolusinginfraredrayscanbecarriedoutwhenthepowersupplyofthetransmissiondeviceis switched off.

13. SLOT (→page175)

14. Service terminal Forserviceonly

Page 27: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

10

1. Introduction

❹ Part Names of the Remote Control

1. Infrared Transmitter (→page12)

2. RemoteJack Connectacommerciallyavailableremotecablehereforwiredopera-tion.(→page12)

3. POWERONButton (→page17)

4. POWEROFFButton (→page34)

5. INFO/L-CALIB.Button Displaythe[SOURCE(1)]screenoftheon-screenmenu.

(→page18,137)

6. VOL./FOCUS+/−Buttons (→page26)

7. D-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−Buttons (→page38)

8. TESTButton (→page86)

9. ECO/L-SHIFTButton (→page25,39)

10.MENUButton (→page78)

11.EXITButton (→page78)

12.ENTERButton (→page78)

13. ▲▼◀▶Button (→page78)

14.ON-SCREENButton (→page36)

15.SHUTTERButton (→page36)

16.AV-MUTEButton (→page36)

17.PICTUREButton (→page90)

18.SOURCEButton (→page20)

19.3DREFORMButton (→page42)

20.PIP/FREEZEButton (→page37,69)

1

3

4

6

14

10

12

16

20

7

2

5

8

9

11

15

1817

13

2119

252832

2322

35

24

30

26

29

34

27

3136

33

21.AUTOADJ.Button (→page33)

22,23.COMPUTER1/2Button (→page20)

24.COMPUTER3Button (This button is notwork on thisprojector.)

25.VIDEOButton (→page20)

26.S-VIDEOButton (→page20)

27.HDMIButton (→page20)

28.DisplayPortButton (→page20)

29.VIEWERButton (TheVIEWERbuttonwillnotworkonthisseriesofprojectors.)

30.NETWORKButton (→page20)

31.SLOTButton (→page175)

32.IDSETButton (→page125)

33.Numeric(0to9/CLEAR)But-tons

(→page125) (TheAUXbuttonwillnotworkonthisseriesofprojectors.)

34.CTLButton Thisbuttonisusedinconjunctionwith other buttons, similar to aCTRLkeyonacomputer.

35.LIGHTButton Thisbuttonisusedtoturnonthebacklight for the remote controlbuttons.

The backlight will turn off if nobutton operation ismade for 10seconds.

36.HELPButton (→page137)

Page 28: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

11

1. Introduction

Battery Installation1. Press the catch and remove

the battery cover.2. Install new ones (AA). En-

sure that you have the bat-teries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.

3. Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place.

NOTE:Donotmixdifferenttypesofbatteriesornewand old batteries.

1

2 1 2

Remote Control Precautions

• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Page 29: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

12

1. Introduction

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

7m/276inch

7m/276inch

Remotecontrol

Remotesensoronprojectorcabinet

7m/276inch

7m/276inch

30°

30°

30°

30°15°

30°

30°

30°15°

30°

• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabovemetersandwithina60-degreeangleoftheremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.

• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfallsonthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.

Using the Remote Control in Wired OperationConnectoneendoftheremotecabletotheREMOTEterminalandtheotherendtotheremotejackontheremotecontrol.

REMOTE

RemoteJack

NOTE: • WhenaremotecableisinsertedintotheREMOTEterminal,theremotecontroldoesnotworkforinfraredwirelesscommunication.• PowerwillnotbesuppliedtotheremotecontrolbytheprojectorviatheREMOTEjack.Batteryisneededwhentheremotecontrol

is used in wired operation.

Page 30: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

13

Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.

❶ Flow of Projecting an Image

Step 1• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→ page 14)

Step 2 • Turningontheprojector(→ page 17)

Step 3 • Selectingasource(→ page 20)

Step 4• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→ page 22)

• Correctingkeystonedistortion[CORNERSTONE](→ page 42)

Step 5• Adjustingapicture

- Optimizingacomputersignalautomatically(→page33)

Step 6• Makingapresentation

Step 7• Turningofftheprojector(→ page 34)

Step 8• Afteruse(→ page 35)

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Page 31: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

14

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord

1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.

Thissectionwillshowyouabasicconnectiontoacomputer.Forinformationaboutotherconnections,see“(2)MakingConnections”onpage143.

Connectthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheCOMPUTERINterminalontheprojectorwithacommercially-availablecomputercable(withferritecore)andthenturntheknobsoftheterminalstosecurethem.

2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.

WARNING

MAKESURETOTAKETHEGROUNDCONNECTIONFORTHEDEVICE.TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT'SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDOR INANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

ImportantInformation:

• Whenplugginginorunpluggingthesuppliedpowercord,makesurethatthemainpowerswitchispushedtotheoff[O]position.Failuretodosomaycausedamagetotheprojector.

• Donotuseathree-phasepowersupply.Doingsomaycauseofmalfunction.

Firstconnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplugtotheACINterminaloftheprojector,andthenconnecttheotherplugofthesuppliedpowercordinthewalloutlet.

COMPUTER IN

MakesurethattheprongsarefullyinsertedintoboththeACINterminalandthewalloutlet.

Towalloutlet

Computercable(withferritecore)(soldcommercially)

Page 32: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

15

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

Using the Supplied Power CordsSelectthepowercordsuitableforyourcountryorregion.

ForEurope/Asia/SouthAmerica ForNorthAmerica

(120V) (200V)

(→page183)

Page 33: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

16

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Using the Power Cord StopperTopreventthepowercordfromaccidentlyremovingfromtheACINoftheprojector,attachthepowercordstoppertoclampthepowercord.

CAUTION• Topreventthepowercordfromcomingloose,makesurethatalltheprongsofthepowercordarefullyinsertedintotheACINterminaloftheprojectorbeforeusingthepowercordstoppertofixthepowercord.Aloosecontactofthepowercordmaycauseafireorelectricshock.

Attaching the power cord stopper1. Raise up the power cord stopper and lay it over the power cord.

Powercordstopper

• Forreleasingthestopper,raiseupthestopperandlayitdowntotheoppositeside.

Page 34: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

17

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❸ Turning on the ProjectorNOTE:• Theprojectorhastwopowerswitches:AmainpowerswitchandaPOWERbutton(POWERONandOFFontheremotecontrol)•Turningontheprojector:1. Press the main power switch to the ON position (I).

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

2. Press the POWER button .

Theprojectorwillbecomereadytouse.

•Turningofftheprojector:1. Press the POWER button.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the POWER button again.

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

3. Press the main power switch to the OFF position (O).

Theprojectorwillbeturnedoff.

Preparation: Remove the lens cap from the lens unit.

1. Press the main power switch to the ON position ( I ).

ThePOWERindicatorlightsupred.*

* ThisindicatesthattheSTANDBYmodeisin[NORMAL]setting.

(→page134,186)

WARNING

Theprojector producesa strong light.When turningonthepower,makesurenoonewithinprojection range islookingatthelens.

NOTE: • The[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojector

willgointothesleepmodewhenthenetworkserviceisutilizedortheprojectorreceivesHDBaseTsignal.Inthesleepmode,thefansin the projector rotate for the purpose of interior parts protection. Pleaserefertopage134aboutthesleepmode.

Page 35: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

18

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control.

The POWER indicator goes from a steady red light toaflashingblue light,and thepicture isprojectedon thescreen.

TIP:• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOUR

PASSWORD.” is displayed, it means that the [SECURITY]featureisturnedon.(→ page 45)

Afteryouturnonyourprojector,ensurethatthecomputerorvideosourceisturnedon.

NOTE:Thebluescreen([BLUE]background)isdisplayedwhennosignalisbeinginput(byfactorydefaultmenusettings).

Standby Blinking Power On

Steady red light Blinking blue light

Steady blue light

(→page186)

Performing Lens Calibration Afterinstallationorreplacementofthelens,besuretoperform[LENSCALIBRATION]bypressingandholdingtheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbutton on theprojector cabinet for at leasttwosecondsorbyholdingtheCTLbuttonandpressingtheINFO/L-CALIB.buttonontheremotecontrol.Calibrationcor-rectstheadjustablezoom,shift,andfocusrange.Ifcalibrationisnotperformed,youmaynotbeabletogetthebestfocusandzoomevenifyouadjustthefocusandzoomforthelens.• Thefollowinglensesneedcalibration: NP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL,NP31ZL

Page 36: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

19

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)Whenyoufirstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectoneofthe29menulanguages.

To select a menu language, follow these steps:

1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶buttontoselectoneofthe29languagesfromthemenu.

2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.

After this has been done, you can proceed to themenuoperation.Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.(→[LANGUAGE]onpage82and112)

NOTE: • Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.

- Iftheinternaltemperatureoftheprojectoristoohigh,theprojectordetectsabnormalhightemperature.Inthisconditiontheprojectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocooldown.

- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→ page 124)

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.(WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinlongcycles,theOFFTIMERisfunctionedandthepowercanbeturnedoff.)

Page 37: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

20

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❹ Selecting a SourceSelecting the computer or video sourceNOTE:Turnonthecomputerorvideosourceequipmentconnectedtotheprojector.

Detecting the Signal AutomaticallyPress theSOURCEbutton for 1 secondor longer.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:

HDMI→DisplayPort→BNC→BNC(CV)→BNC(Y/C)→COMUPTER→HDBaseT→SLOT→ …

• Pressitbrieflytodisplaythe[INPUT]screen.

Pressthe▼/▲buttonstomatchthetargetinputterminalandthenpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtheinput.Todeletethemenudisplayinthe[INPUT]screen,presstheMENUorEXITbutton.

TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.

Using the Remote ControlPress any oneof theHDMI,DisplayPort,COMPUTER2,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,COMPUTER1,NETWORK,orSLOTbuttons.• COMPUTER2buttonselectstheBNCinputterminal.

• VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(CV)inputterminal(CompositeVideo).

• S-VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(Y/C)inputterminal(S-Video).

Page 38: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

21

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Selecting Default Source Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SOURCEOPTIONS].

4. Press the ▼buttonfourtimestoselect[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(→page132)

5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.

6. Press the EXIT button three times to close the menu.

7. Restart the projector.

Thesourceyouselectedinstep5willbeprojected.

NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[HDBaseT]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[HDBaseT].

TIP:• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINinputwill

powerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage. ([AUTOPOWERONSELECT]→ page 135)• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.

Page 39: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

22

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and PositionUsethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfoot,thezoomringandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.Inthischapterdrawingsandcablesareomittedforclarity.

Adjusting theprojected image’sverticalandhorizontalposition[Lensshift](→page23)

Adjustingthefocus[Focus](→page26)

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage[Zoom](→page31)

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sheightandhorizontaltilt[Tiltfoot]*¹(→page32)

NOTE*1:Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfootwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthelensshiftadjustmentrange.

TIP:• Built-intestpatternscanbeconvenientlyusedforadjustingthepicturesizeandposition.(→ page 86) ApressoftheTESTbuttonwilldisplaythetestpattern.The◀ or ▶ button can select one test pattern. To close the test pattern,

change the source to another.

Page 40: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

23

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)

CAUTION• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Performingadjustmentfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.

NOTE:• ThelensshiftfunctionisnotavailableontheprojectorwitheitherNP16FLorNP39MLlensinstalled. ForusingNP16FL,setbackthelenstothehomeposition. ForusingNP39ML,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(2)]→[LENSPOSITION]→[TYPE]ontheonscreenmenu,thelenswill

bemovedtotheappropriatepositionautomatically.• Shiftingthelenstothemaximuminobliqueanglewillcausetheedgesoftheimagetobecomedarkorwillcausedarkshadows.

Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet1. Press the LENS SHIFT/HOME POSITION button.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

Page 41: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

24

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

• Returningthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition

PressandholdtheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2secondstoreturnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition(nearlycenterposition)

Page 42: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

25

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting with the remote control1. HoldtheCTLbuttonandpresstheECO/L-SHIFTbutton.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

NOTE:LensCalibrationIfthepoweroftheprojectoriswronglyshutdownduringthemotionoflensshift,itmayshiftthehomepositionofthelensandmaycauseofmalfunction.Inthiscase,performlenscalibration.Lenscalibrationprocedures1.Powerontheprojector.2.Pressthe(SHUTTER/CALIBRATION)buttononthecontrolpanelover2secondsorkeeppressingtheCTLbuttonandpressthe

INFO/L-CALIB.buttonontheremotecontrol. Calibrationisperformed.

TIP:• Thediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrange(projectionmode:desktopfront).Toraisetheprojectionpositionhigher

thanthis,adjustbythetiltfoot.(→ page 32)

100%V

50%V

30%V

100%H

20%H

10%H

10%H

20%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthoftheprojectedimage).

Page 43: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

26

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Focus

Applicablelensunit:NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL1. PresstheFOCUS+/−button.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,pressonVOL/FOCUS(+)or(−)button.

Thefocusisadjusted.

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forpermanentinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.

1. UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstomakesureyouobtainthebestfocus.Ifyoudonot,movetheprojectorbackandforth.

2. Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 86)

• YoucanalsousetheTESTbuttonontheremotecontroltodisplaythetestpattern.

3. KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternismadeinvisible.

4. KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus.

Ifyouadjustbeyondthebestfocalpoint,gobacktostep3andrepeattheprocedures.

Page 44: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

27

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Applicablelensunit:NP31ZL1. Focusontheprojectedimagearoundtheopticalaxis.(Poweredfocus)

Thedrawingbelowshowsanexamplewhentheprojectedimageisshiftedupward.Inthiscasetheopticalaxisisatthebottomedgeoftheprojectedimage.

Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet

PresstheFOCUS+/−BUTTONonthecontrolpanel

Adjusting with the remote control

PresstheVOL/FOCUSbuttonholdingtheCTLbutton

Opticalaxis

* Whenthelensisatthecenterposition,theopticalaxisisatthecenteroftheimage.Inthiscase,adjustthefocusatthecenteroftheprojectedimage.

Page 45: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

28

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2. Adjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimage.(Manualfocus)

Turntheedgefocusringclockwiseorcounterclockwise.

Opticalaxis

Thiscompletesadjustingtheprojectedimage’soverallfocus.

NOTE:TheNP31ZLsupportstheLensMemoryfunction,whichallowsyoutostoreadjustedvalueforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus.IfyouaccidentallymovetheEdgefocusring(drawingshownbelow)afterhavingstoredadjustedvalues,theadjustedvaluesstoredintheLensMemorywillnotbecorrectlyapplied.

Edgefocusring

Afterhavingremovedthelensfromtheprojectorandmounteditback,calluptheadjustedvaluesstoredintheLensMemoryandthenfollowStep2intheprocedureabovetoadjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimageagain.

Page 46: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

29

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forpermanentinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.1.PresstheFOCUS+/−buttonstochecktheadjustablefocusrange.Forcheckingitbytheremotecontrol,pressandholdtheCTL

buttonandpressVOL./FOCUS+/−button.Iftheprojectorinuseisnotwithintheadjustablefocusrange,movetheprojectorbackand forth.

2.Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 86)• Fordisplayingthetestpatternbytheremotecontrol,pressTESTbutton.

3.KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternbecomesinvisible.4.KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus. Forobtainingthebestfocusbytheremotecontrol,presstheVOL./FOCUS+buttonwhileholdingtopresstheCTLbutton. Ifyouadjustbeyondthebestfocalpoint,gobacktostep3andrepeattheprocedures.5.Turntheedgefocusringclockwiseorcounterclockwisetoadjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimage.

Applicablelensunit:NP39ML1. Focusontheprojectedimagearoundtheopticalaxis.(Poweredfocus)

Theopticalaxisisatthebottomoftheimage.

PresseithertheFOCUS+/−buttononthecontrolpanelortheVOL/FOCUS+/−buttonwhileholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Opticalaxis

Page 47: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

30

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2. Adjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimage.

PresseithertheZOOM+/−buttononthecontrolpanelortheD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttonwhileholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Focusaroundtheopticalaxissetatstep1isremainedunchanged.

Opticalaxis

3. Repeatsteps1and2untiltheoptimalfocuscanbeobtainedonwholeimage.

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forpermanentinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.

1. UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstomakesureyouobtainthebestfocus.Ifyoudonot,movetheprojectorbackandforth.

2. Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 86)

• YoucanalsousetheTESTbuttonontheremotecontroltodisplaythetestpattern.

3. KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternismadeinvisible.

4. KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus.

Ifyouadjustbeyondthebestfocalpoint,gobacktostep3andrepeattheprocedures.

5. PresstheZOOM+/−buttonforadjustingtheedgesoftheprojectedimage.

PresstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttonholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonforadjustingitbytheremotecontrol.

Repeatsteps1to5untiltheoptimalfocuscanbeobtainedonwholeimage.

Page 48: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

31

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Zoom

Applicablelensunits:NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL/NP31ZL1. Press the ZOOM +/− button.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,presstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)or(−)button.

Thezoomisadjusted.

Page 49: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

32

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the Tilt Foot1. Theposition toproject imagemaybeadjustedby the tilt foot

positionedatfourcornersofthecabinetbottom.

Thetiltfootheightcanbeadjustedbyitsturn.

“Toadjusttheheightoftheprojectedimage”

Theheightoftheprojectedimageisadjustedbyturningeitherfrontorreartiltfoot.

“Iftheprojectedimageistilted”

Iftheprojectedimageistilted,turneitherleftorrighttiltfoottoadjusttheimagesothatitislevel.

• Iftheprojectedimageisdistorted,see“3-7CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page42) and“[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]”(→page105).

• Thetiltfootcanbelengthenedbyamaximumof48mm.

• Thetiltfootcanbeusedtotilttheprojectorbyamaximumof6°.

NOTE:• Donotlengthenthetiltfootanymorethan50mm/1.9".Doingsowillmakethe

tiltfeet’smountsectionunstableandcouldcausethetiltfeettocomeofftheprojector.

• Payattentiontolengthenorshortentwotiltfootatfrontatthesametime.Samefor the rear foot, otherwise, the weight of the projector is loaded on one side anditmaycauseofdamagetoit.

• Donotuse the tilt foot foranypurposeother thanadjusting theprojector’sprojection angle.

Handlingthetiltfootimproperly,suchascarryingtheprojectorbygraspingthetiltfootorhookingitontoawallusingthetiltfoot,coulddamagetheprojector.

• PleasechecklevelofthelensunitWhenthelensunitNP39MLisinstalledonsincethelensunitmaysligtlyinclineinleftorright.

Tiltfoot(thereisonemoreintherear)

Up Down

Page 50: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

33

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❻ Optimizing Computer Signal AutomaticallyAdjusting the Image Using Auto AdjustWhenanimagefromHDMIIN,DisplayPortIN,BNCinputterminal(analogRGB),COMPUTERIN,orHDBaseTisbeingprojected,andtheedgeiscutoffortheimagequalityispoor,thisbuttoncanbeusedtoautomaticallyoptimizetheprojectionimageonthescreen.

PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.

[Poorpicture] [Adjustedpicture]

NOTE:Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]

manually.(→ page 94, 95)• Ifyoucannotobtainanoptimizedpicture,referpage190.

Page 51: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

34

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❼ Turning off the Projector1. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet

or the POWER OFF button on the remote control.

The[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?/CARBONSAV-INGS-SESSION0.000[g-CO2]]messagewillappear.

2. Press one among the ENTER, the (POWER), and the POWER OFF button.

When theprojector is inSTANDBYMODE, thePOWERindicator lights up red. (When [STANDBY MODE] is in[NORMAL]setting)

• Ifyoudonotwanttoturnoff,select[NO]by◀/▶buttonandpressENTER.

3. Make sure the projector is in STANDBY MODE, then turnoffthemainpowerswitch(○ OFF)

ThePOWERindicatorwillgooffandthemainpowerwillturnoff.

• While the POWER indicator is blinking blue in shortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.

Power On

Steady blue light

Standby

Steady red lightPress twice

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaytemporarilyoverheatiftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththemainpowerswitchortheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedwhiletheprojectorisinoperationorthecoolingfanisrunning.Handlewithcare.

Page 52: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

35

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

NOTE:• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocould

deterioratetheprojector’sACINterminalorthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.

• DonotturnoffthemainpowerswitchordisconnecttheACpowersupplywithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentsorsettingchangesandclosingthemenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.

❽ After UsePreparation:Makesurethattheprojectoristurnedoff.

1. Unplug the power cord.

2. Disconnect any other cables.

3. Mount the lens cap on the lens.

4. Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfeetiftheyhavebeenlengthened.

Page 53: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

36

3. Convenient Features❶ Turn off the light of the projector (LENS SHUTTER)PresstheSHUTTERbutton.Thelightsourcewillturnofftemporarily.Pressagaintoallowthescreentobecomeilluminatedagain.• Anotherwaytoshut the lightsourceoff is topresstheSHUTTERbuttonontheremotecontrol.

• Youcansettheprojectionlighttograduallyfadeinorout.

NOTE: • DonotpressandholdtheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbuttononthecabinetover

2seconds.Itwillstartthelenscalibration.

❷ Turning off the ImagePresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageforashortperiodoftime.Pressagaintorestoretheimage.

TIP:• Thevideowilldisappearbutnotthemenudisplay.

❸ Turning Off the On-Screen Menu (On-Screen Mute)ApressoftheON-SCREENbuttonontheremotecontrolwillhidetheon-screenmenu,thesourcedisplayandothermessages.Pressagaintorestorethem.

TIP:• Toconfirmthattheon-screenmuteisturnedon,presstheMENUbutton.Iftheon-screenmenuisnotdisplayedeventhough

youpresstheMENUbutton,itmeanstheon-screenmuteisturnedon.• Theon-screenmuteismaintainedevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,• HoldingdowntheMENUbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforatleast10secondswillturnofftheon-screenmute.

Page 54: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

37

3. Convenient Features

❹ Freezing a PictureHoldtheCTLbuttonandpressthePIP/FREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresumemotion.

NOTE:Theimageisfrozenbuttheoriginalvideoisstillplayingahead.

Page 55: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

38

3. Convenient Features

❺ Magnifying a PictureYoucanmagnifythepictureuptofourtimes.

NOTE: • Dependingonaninputsignal,themaximummagnificationmaybelessthanfourtimes,orthefunctionmayberestricted.

Todoso:

1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.

2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button. Theareaofthemagnifiedimagewillbemoved

3. Press the D-ZOOM (−) button.

EachtimetheD-ZOOM(−)buttonispressed,theimageisdemagni-fied.

NOTE: • Theimagewillbemagnifiedordemagnifiedatthecenterofthescreen.• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnification.

Page 56: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

39

3. Convenient Features

❻ Changing LIGHT MODE/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using LIGHT MODE [LIGHT MODE]Wheneither[ECO1]or[ECO2]in[LIGHTMODE]isselected,motionnoiseoftheprojectoriscutdownbyloweringbrightnessofitslightsource.Bysavingenergyconsumption,theCO2emissionfromthisprojectorcanbereduced.

LIGHTMODEIconatthebottomofthemenu

Description

NORMAL 100%brightnessThescreenwillbebrightlylit.

ECO1 Brightnesswillbeatabout80%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lowerpowerconsumption

ECO2 Brightnesswillbeatabout50%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lowerpowerconsumptionconsiderably

Toturnonthe[LIGHTMODE],dothefollowing:1. Press LIGHT button on the cabinet.

• Inanotherway,pressECO/L-SHIFTbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The[LIGHTMODE]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ENTER button.

The[LIGHTMODE]selectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ▼▲ buttons to make a selection, and press the ENTER button.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[LIGHTMODE]screenandtheselectedoptionwillbeapplied.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

Page 57: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

40

3. Convenient Features

NOTE: • The[LIGHTMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu. Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(1)]→[LIGHTMODE]→[LIGHTMODE].• Thelightmodulehoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME]onthemenu.Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[LIGHTMODE]willautomaticallyswitch

to[ECO].• Thisprojectorequipsthesensortodetectatmosphericpressureandtemperatureandtheprojectorcontrolsthepowerbasedon

thedetectedvalues.Whentheprojectorisusedinhighaltitudeandhightemperature,thelightsourcebrightnessbecomeslowerregardlessofthesettingforLIGHTMODE.Thisiscalled“ForcedECOMODE”.PleasereferthebelowtablefortheconditionsandoutputpowerinForcedECOMODE.

Altitudes Atmospherictemperature

5–25°C(41–77°F)

26–30°C(78–86°F)

31–35°C(87–95°F)

36–40°C(96–104°F)

1600–3000m(5500–10000ft)

100% 90% 80% 70%

1200–1600m(4000–5500ft)

100% 90% 80%

0–1200m(0–4000ft)

100% 80%

• WhentheprojectorisintheForcedLIGHTMODE,thepicturebrightnessdecreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedatthebottomrightofthescreen.

Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedECOMODEiscancelledandthe[LIGHTMODE]returnsto[NORMAL]mode.

Page 58: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

41

3. Convenient Features

Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[LIGHTMODE]issettoeither[ECO1]or[ECO2].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].

Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcanchecktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page137)

The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2emissionreductionbetweenthetimeofchangingtoLIGHTMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.

TIP:• TheformulashownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2emissionreduction.AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(Power

consumptionin[NORMAL]LIGHTMODE–Powerconsumptionincurrentsetting)×CO2conversionfactor.*Whenanenergy-savingLIGHTMODEisselected,ortheLensShutterisused,therewillbeafurtherreductioninCO2emission.* CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,

2008Edition”.• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[LIGHTMODE]isturnedonoroff.

Page 59: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

42

3. Convenient Features

❼ Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]

Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.

1. Pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2secondsatleasttoresetcurrentadjustments.

Currentadjustmentsfor[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]willbecleared.

2. Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.

Projectedimage

Thedrawingshowstheupperrightcorner.

3. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.

4. Press the 3D REFORM button.

Displaythe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screenoftheon-screenmenu.

Page 60: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

43

3. Convenient Features

5. Press the ▼buttontoalignwiththe[CORNERSTONE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Thedrawingshowstheupperlefticon( )isselected.

Thescreenwillswitchtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen.

NOTE:• Whena[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]functionotherthan[CORNERSTONE]hasbeensetup,the[CORNERSTONE]screen

willnotbedisplayed.Whenthescreenisnotdisplayed,eitherpressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds,orrun[RESET]in[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]tocleartheadjustmentvalueof[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].

6. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲) which points in the direction you wish to move the projected imageframe.

7. Press the ENTER button.

8. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.

9. PresstheENTERbutton.

10. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select another icon which points in the direction.

11.Repeatstepsfrom7to10tocompletethecornerstoneadjustment.

12.Onthe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[EXIT]orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Theconfirmationscreenisdisplayed.

Page 61: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

44

3. Convenient Features

13. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiscompletesthe[CORNERSTONE]correction.

• Returningtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[CANCEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: • Eveniftheinstallationangleischangedwhentheprojectoristurnedonagain,thecorrectionvaluesintheprevioustimehasbeen

maintained.• Carryouteitheroneofthefollowingactionstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[CORNERSTONE].

• InStep12,select[RESET]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Run[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[RESET]intheon-screenmenu.

• UsingCORNERSTONEcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

Page 62: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

45

3. Convenient Features

❽ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeywordisset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-jectorcannotprojectanimage.•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.

To enable the Security function:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[MENU].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[CONTROL].

4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[SECURITYKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Typeyourkeywordinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.

The[CONFIRMKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.

Page 63: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

46

3. Convenient Features

7. Typeyourkeywordinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYfunctionhasbeenenabled.

Toturnontheprojectorwhen[SECURITY]isenabled:

1. Press the button.

• Ifusingtheremotecontrol,pressthePOWERONbutton.

Theprojectorwillbeturnedonanddisplayamessagetotheeffectthattheprojectorislocked.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.

NOTE:Thesecuritydisablemodeismaintaineduntilthemainpoweristurnedofforunpluggingthepowercord.

Page 64: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

47

3. Convenient Features

TodisabletheSECURITYfunction:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYKEYWORDscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.

Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequestcode.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConfirmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]is a request code.

Page 65: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

48

3. Convenient Features

❾ Projecting 3D videosThisprojectorsupportsDLP-Linkglassesand3Demitter.

CAUTION

Health precautionsBeforeuse,pleasemakesuretoreadanyhealthprecautionsthatmaybestatedintheoperatingmanualsenclosedwiththe3Deyewearand3Dvideosoftware(Blu-rayplayer,games,computeranimationfiles,etc.).Pleasetakenoteofthefollowinginordertoavoidadversehealtheffects.• Pleasedonotusethe3Deyewearforpurposesotherthantowatch3Dvideos.• Pleasekeepadistanceofatleast2mawayfromthescreenwhenwatchingvideos.Watchingavideotooclosetothescreenwillincreaseeyefatigue.• Pleasedonotwatchvideoscontinuouslyforalongperiodoftime.Pleasetakea15minutes’breakaftereveryhourofwatching.• Pleaseconsultadoctorbeforewatchingifyouoranyofyourfamilymembershaveahistoryofsufferingfromseizurescausedbylightsensitivity.• Pleasestopwatchingimmediatelyandtakearestwhenyoufeelphysicallyunwellwhilewatching(vomiting,gid-diness,nausea,headaches,soreeyes,blurredvision,crampsanddumbnessinthelimbs,etc.).Pleaseconsultadoctorifthesymptomspersist.• Pleasewatcha3Dvideodirectlyinfrontofthescreen.Ifyouwatcha3Dvideoobliquelyfromthesides,thismayresultinphysicalandeyefatigue.

Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projectorThedescriptionhereareforDLP®Link.[DLP®Link]isdefaultsettingfor[3DGLASSES]atthefactory.

3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparationsUseDLP®Linkglassesorothercompatiblecommercially-availableliquidcrystalshutterspectacles.

1. Connectthevideodevicetotheprojector.

2. Switch on the projector.

3. Runthe3Dvideosoftware.

The3Dvideowillbeprojected.

Thedefaultfactorysettingis[AUTO].When3Dimageisnotprojected,itmaycauseinputsignaldoesnotcontain3Ddetectionsignaloritcannotbedetectedbythisprojector.Inthiscase,pleasesetuptheformatmanually.

(1)PresstheMENUbutton.

TheMENUwillbedisplayed.

(2)Pressthe▶button,select[ADJUST],thenpressENTER.

[PICTURE]willbehighlighted.

(3)Usethe▶buttontoselect[3DSETTINGS].

Page 66: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

49

3. Convenient Features

The[3DSETTINGS]screenwillbedisplayed.

(4)Usethe▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[FORMAT],thenpressENTER.

The[FORMAT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(5)Usethe▼/▲buttonstoalignthecursoratoneamongformatoptions,thenpressENTERforsettingitup.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[FORMAT]screen.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

• The3Dcautionmessagescreenwillbedisplayedwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo(defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped).Pleasereadthe“HealthPrecautions”onthepreviouspagetowatchvideosinthecorrectmanner.Thescreenwilldisappearafter60secondsorwhentheENTERbuttonispressed.(→page113)

4. Turnonthepowersupplyofthe3Deyewearandweartheeyeweartowatchthevideo.

Anormalvideowillbeshownwhena2Dvideoisinput.

Towatcha3Dvideoin2D,select[OFF(2D)]inthe[FORMAT]screenmentionedabovein(3).

NOTE:• If3Dcontentisplayedbackonyourcomputerandtheperformanceispoor,itmaybecausedbytheCPUorgraphicschip.Inthis

caseyoumayhavedifficultyseeingthe3Dimagesastheywereintended.Checktoseeifyourcomputermeetstherequirementsprovidedinyouruser’smanualincludedwithyour3Dcontent.

• TheDLP®Linkcompatible3Deyeglassesallowyoutoview3Dimagesbyreceivingsynchsignals,whichareincludedinlefteyeandrighteyeimages,reflectedfromthescreen.Dependingonenvironmentsorconditionssuchastheambientbrightness,screensizeorviewingdistance,the3Deyeglassesmayfailtoreceivesynchsignals,causingpoor3Dimages.

• Whenthe3Dmodeisenabled,theKeystonecorrectionrangewillbenarrower.• Whenthe3Dmodeisenabled,thefollowingsettingsareinvalid. [WALLCOLOR],[PRESET],[REFERENCE],[COLORTEMPERATURE],[DYNAMICCONTRAST],[BrilliantColor]• Signalsotherthanthoselistedin“CompatibleInputSignalList”onpage178 and 179willbeoutofrangeordisplayedin2D.

Page 67: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

50

3. Convenient Features

Using a 3D emitterThisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewear.Inordertosynchronizethe3Dvideoandeyewear,acommercially-available3Demitterneedstobeconnectedtotheprojector(ontheprojectorside).The3Deyewearreceivesinformationfromthe3Demitterandperformsopeningandclosingontheleftandright.

3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparationsPleaseuseanactiveshutter-type3DeyewearthatconformswiththeVESAstandard.Acommercially-availableRFtypemadebyXpandisrecommended.

3D eyewear ������������ Xpand X105-RF-X23D emitter �������������� Xpand AD025-RF-X1

Connectyour3Demittertothe3DSYNCterminaloftheprojector.Change[3DGLASSES]settingto[OTHERS].

NOTE:• Uponswitchingto3Dimage,thefollowingfunctionswillbecancelledanddisabled.[BLANKING],[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE],

[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[EDGEBLENDING]([GEOMETRICCORRECTION]and[EDGEBLENDING]adjustmentvalueswillbemaintained.)

• Theoutputmaynotautomaticallyswitchtoa3Dvideodependingonthe3Dinputsignal.• ChecktheoperatingconditionsdescribedintheusermanualoftheBlu-rayplayer.• PleaseconnecttheDINterminalofthe3Demittertothe3DSYNCofthemainprojector.• The3Deyewearallowsvideostobeviewedin3Dbyreceivingsynchronizedopticalsignalsoutputfromthe3Demitter. Asaresult,the3Dimagequalitymaybeaffectedbyconditionssuchasthebrightnessofthesurroundings,screensize,viewing

distance, etc.• Whenplayinga3Dvideosoftwareonacomputer,the3DimagequalitymaybeaffectedifthecomputerCPUandgraphicschip

performancearelow.Pleasechecktherequiredoperatingenvironmentofthecomputerthatisstatedintheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Dvideosoftware.

• Dependingonthesignal,[FORMAT]and[L/RINVERT]maynotbeabletobeselected.Pleasechangethesignalinthatcase.

Page 68: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

51

3. Convenient Features

When videos cannot be viewed in 3DPleasecheckthefollowingpointswhenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D.Pleasealsoreadtheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Deyewear.

Possible reasons Solutions

The selected signal does not support 3D output� Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D�

The format for the selected signal is turned to [OFF(2D)]� Please change the format in the on-screen menu to [AUTO] or a format that supports 3D�

A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used� Please purchase a commercially-available 3D eyewear or 3D emit-ter (recommended)� (→ page 50)

Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in 3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector�

The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off� Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear�

The internal battery of the 3D eyewear is flat� Please charge or replace the battery�

The viewer is located too far away from the screen� Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vicinity, the projectors may interfere with one another� Alter-natively, there may be a bright light source near the screen�

Please maintain sufficient distance between the projectors�

Please keep the light source away from the screen�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Please check the following points when videos played back on the computer cannot be viewed in 3D�

Settings on the computer are not compatible with 3D video playback�

Check to make sure that settings on the computer meet require-ments for 3D video playback�

Image resolution on the computer cannot be recognized by the projector as 3D video�

Change the image resolution on the computer to one that the projector can recognize as 3D video�

The vertical scan rate on the computer cannot be recognized by the projector as 3D video�

Change the vertical scan rate on the computer to 60 Hz or 120 Hz�

There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eye-wear and the 3D emitter�

Please remove the obstacle�

The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported� Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents�

Page 69: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

52

3. Convenient Features

❿ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP BrowserOverviewTheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:1. Settingforwirednetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)

TousewiredLANconnection,connecttheprojectortothecomputerwithacommerciallyavailableLANcable.(→ page152)

2. Setting Alert Mail (ALERT MAIL)

Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoawirednetwork,errormessageswillbesentviae-mail.

3. Operating the projector

Poweron/off,selectinginput,volumecontrolandpictureadjustmentsarepossible.

4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON

AccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionisavailable:• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing

URL :

http://<the projector’s IP address> /index.html

TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].

NOTE: • Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournetwork. Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedin

rapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-tor.

• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourwebbrowser(orclearthecache).

• Thisprojectoruses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwillvarydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelpfilesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.

Preparation before UseConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page152)Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthesettingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeensetwillnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbereflectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.

Page 70: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

53

3. Convenient Features

Handling of the Address for Operation via a BrowserRegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”fileofthecomputerbeingused.

Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT

POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�

VOLUME:Cannotbeusedforthisdevice.

AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.PICTURE ON ���������� Mutes the video�PICTURE OFF ��������� Cancels the video muting�SOUND ON ������������ Cannot be used for this device�SOUND OFF ����������� Cannot be used for this device�ALL ON ������������������ Mutes the video functions�ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of the video functions�

Page 71: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

54

3. Convenient Features

PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.BRIGHTNESS ▲ ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�BRIGHTNESS ▼ ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�CONTRAST ▲ �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�CONTRAST ▼ �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�COLOR ▲ �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�COLOR ▼ �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�HUE ▲ ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�HUE ▼ ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▲ ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▼ ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page93)

SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputterminaloftheprojector.HDMI ��������������������� Switches to the HDMI IN terminal�DisplayPort ������������ Switches to the DisplayPort IN�BNC ����������������������� Switch to BNC video input�BNC(CV) ���������������� Switch to BNC (CV) video input�BNC(Y/C) ��������������� Switch to BNC (Y/C) video input�COMPUTER ����������� Switches to the COMPUTER IN terminal�HDBaseT ���������������� Switch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT�SLOT ���������������������� The projector switches to video input from the optional board when an optional board (sold separately) is

equipped on�

PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.LIGHT HOURS USED ����������Displays how many hours the light module has been used�ERROR STATUS ������������������Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�

LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).

Page 72: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

55

3. Convenient Features

NETWORK SETTINGS

•SETTINGS

WIRED

SETTING SetforwiredLAN.

APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLAN.

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection

DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.

DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassign IPaddressofDNSserverconnected to theprojector.

AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

Page 73: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

56

3. Convenient Features

•NAME

PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorso thatyourcomputercan identify theprojector.Aprojectornamemustbe16charactersorless.TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe15orless.

DOMAINNAME Enter thedomainnameof thenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainnamemustbe60charactersorless.

•ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwiredLAN.PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PX803ULSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]

SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.

SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.

RECIPIENT’SADDRESS1,2,3

Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.

TESTMAIL SendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornotNOTE:• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork

settings are correct.• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthis

happen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.

Page 74: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

57

3. Convenient Features

•NETWORKSERVICE

PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.Whenapasswordissetup,youwillbepromptedforyourusername(arbitrary)andpasswordduringLOGON.

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.

*WhatisPJLink?PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.ThisstandardprotocolisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

CRESTRON

•ROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.

DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.

ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.

•CRESTRONCONTROLformanagingfromthecontroller.

DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.

IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

•INFORMATION

WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.

UPDATE Reflectsettingswhentheyarechanged.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 75: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

58

3. Convenient Features

⓫ Storing Changes for Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus [LENS MEMORY]TheadjustedvaluescanbestoredinprojectormemorywhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.Therearetwowaystosaveadjustedvaluesforlensshift,zoom,andfocus.

Functionname Description page

REF.LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluescommontoallinputsignals.Atthetimeofinstallation,twokindsofadjustedvaluescanberecorded.Ifnoadjustedvaluesarestoredin[LENSMEMORY],adjustedvaluesfromtheselectedprofile([REF.LENSMEMORY])willbeappliedforlensadjustment.

→page118

LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluesforeachinputsignal.Usetheadjustedvaluesforthesignalwithadifferentaspectratioorresolution.Theadjustedvaluescanbeappliedatthetimeofsourceselection.

→page101

NOTE:• ForusingthelensunitNP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL,andNP31ZL,besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRA-

TION]afterreplacingthelensunit.(→ page 18, 118)• Forthelensunit,NP16FL,thestorablevalueas[LENSMEMORY]featureisfor[FOCUS]only.• The[LENSMEMORY]featureisnotavailableforthelensunit,NP39ML.

Page 76: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

59

3. Convenient Features

To store your adjusted values in [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(2)].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[REF.LENSMEMORY]screenwillbedisplayed.

5. Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROFILE]selectionscreenappears.

6. Press the ▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[REF.LENSMEMORY]settingsscreen.

7. Select[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Page 77: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

60

3. Convenient Features

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Selecta[PROFILE]numberandsavetheadjusted[LENSSHIFT],[ZOOM],and[FOCUS]valuestoit.

• The[FORCEDMUTE]settingstopsprojectionduringlensshift.(→page118)

9. PresstheMENUbutton.

Themenuwillbeclosed.

TIP:• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 101)

Page 78: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

61

3. Convenient Features

To call up your adjusted values from [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(2)].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[REF.LENSMEMORY]screenwillbedisplayed.

5. Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROFILE]selectionscreenappears.

6. Press the ▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[REF.LENSMEMORY]settingsscreen.

7. Select[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Page 79: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

62

3. Convenient Features

Thelenswillshiftbasedontheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[PROFILE].

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theadjustedvalueswillbeappliedtothecurrentsignal..

9. PresstheMENUbutton.

Themenuwillbeclosed.

Page 80: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

63

3. Convenient Features

TIP:Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Duringprojection,iftheadjustedvaluesforaninputsignalhavebeensaved,thelenswillshift.Ifnot,thelenswillshiftaccordingtotheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[REF.LENSMEMORY][PROFILE]number.

Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]andpresstheENTERbut-

ton.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillmovethelensautomaticallytothepositionatthetimeofsourceselectionaccordingtotheadjustedvalues.

NOTE:TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjustedvaluesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelensshift,zoomandfocustoproducethebestpossibleimage.

Page 81: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

64

4. Multi-Screen Projection❶ Things that can be done using multi-screen projectionThisprojectorcanbeusedsinglyorarrangedinmultipleunitsformulti-screenprojection.Wewillintroduceanexampleusingtwoprojectionscreenshere.

Case 1Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideosatthesametime[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]

Case 2Usingfourprojectors(resolution:WUXGA)toprojectvideowitharesolutionof2560×1600pixels[TILING]

Case 1. Using a single projector to project two types of videos [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

Connection example and projection image

Inthecaseof[PICTUREBYPICTURE] Inthecaseof[PIP]

On-screen menu operationsDisplay[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE].Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”.(→page68)

Page 82: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

65

Case 2. Using four projectors (resolution: WUXGA) to project videos with a resolution of 2560 × 1600 pixels [TILING]

Connection example and projection image

On-screen menu operations1 Foursimilarvideosaredisplayedwhenfourprojectorsareprojected.

Pleaserequestthedealertoadjusttheprojectionpositionofeachprojector.

Page 83: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

66

2 Operatetheon-screenmenuusingthefourrespectiveprojectorstodividetheimageintofourportions.

Display[DISPLAY]→[MULTISCREEN]→[PICTURESETTING]Screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[TIL-ING].

(1)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofhorizontalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsinthehorizontaldirec-tion)

(2)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofverticalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsintheverticaldirection)

(3)Inthescreenforsettingthehorizontalorder,select[1stUNIT]or[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneontheleftisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneontherightisthe[2ndUNIT])

(4)Inthescreenforsettingtheverticalorder,selectthe[1stUNIT]orthe[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneatthetopisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneatthebottomisthe[2ndUNIT])

3 Adjustthelensshiftofeachprojectortofine-tunetheboundariesofthescreen.

Forfurtherfine-tuning,adjustusing[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]intheon-screenmenuforeachprojector.

Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-3DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING]”.

(→page72)

Page 84: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

67

Things to note when installing projectors• Leave30cmoroverspacebetweeneachprojectorsandbetweentheintakeventandthewallforinstallingprojec-torssidebyside,sothatairintakeoftheprojectorsarenotobstructed.Whentheairintakeanddischargeoutletareobstructed,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillriseandthismayresultinamalfunction.

30cmorgreater

• Twoprojectorscanbestackedontopofeachother(STACKsetting).(→page156)Donotattempttodirectlystackthreeormoreprojectors.Whentheprojectorsarepiledupontopofoneanother,theymayfalldown,resultingindamageandfailure.

• Installationexamplewhenusing3ormoreprojectors Thefollowinginstallationisrecommendedwheninstallingacombinationof3ormoreprojectorsformulti-screenprojection.[Installationexample]

ExhaustventIntakevent Cabinet

Airexhaust

Airintake

Back Back

WARNING

Pleaserequestthedealerforspecialinstallationservicessuchaswhenmountingtheprojectortotheceiling.Nevercarryouttheinstallationbyyourself.Theprojectormayfalldownandresultininjury.Pleaseuseasturdycabinetthatcanwithstandtheweightoftheprojectorfortheinstallation.Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyontopofoneanother.

NOTE:• Fortherangeoftheprojectiondistance,pleaserefertotheAppendix“Throwdistanceandscreensize”.(→ page 171)

Page 85: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

68

❷ Displaying Two Pictures at the Same TimeTheprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:pictureinpicture(PIP)modeandpicturebypicture(PICTUREBYPICTURE)mode.Theprojectionvideointhefirstscreendisplayisknownasthemaindisplaywhiletheprojectionvideothatiscalledoutsubsequentlyisknownasthesub-display.Selecttheprojectionfunctionunder[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]intheon-screenmenu(thedefaultfactorysettingwhenshippedisPIP).(→page103)• Asinglescreenisprojectedwhenpoweristurnedon.

PictureinPicturefunction(PIP)Asmallsub-displayisdisplayedinsidethemaindisplay.

Thesub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→page104)• Selectwhethertodisplaythesub-displayatthetopright,topleft,bottomrightorbottomleftofthescreen(thesizeofthesub-displaycanbeselectedandthepositioncanbefine-tuned)• Switchthemaindisplaywiththesub-display

Main Display

Sub-Display

Picturebypicturefunction(PICTUREBYPICTURE)Displaythemaindisplayandsub-displaysidebyside.

Themaindisplayandsub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→ page104)• Selectingthedisplayboundary(ratio)ofthemaindisplayandsub-display• Switchthemaindisplayandsub-display

Main Display Sub-Display

Input terminals that can be used for the main screen and sub-screen.Themainscreenandsub-screencanprovidethefollowinginputterminals.• Themaindisplayandsub-displaysupportcomputersignalsuptoWUXGA@60HzRB.

Sub-Display or additional displayHDMI DisplayPort BNC BNC(CV) BNC(Y/C) COMPUTER HDBaseT SLOT

Main Display

HDMI No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoDisplayPort Yes Yes Yes YesBNC Yes Yes

NoNo Yes Yes

BNC(CV) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesBNC(Y/C) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesCOMPUTER Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes YesHDBaseT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoSLOT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

NOTE:• Somesignalsmaynotappeardependingontheresolution.

Page 86: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

69

Projecting two screens1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[SUBINPUT]usingthe▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

Thisdisplaysthe[SUBINPUT]screen.

3. Select the input signal using the ▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

The[PIP](PICTUREINPICTURE)or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screensetupunder[MODE]isprojected.(→page103)

• Whenthesignalnameisdisplayedingrey,thismeansthatitcannotbeselected.

• ThesignalcanalsobeselectedbypressingthePIP/FREEZEbuttonontheremotecontrol.

4. Press the MENU button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

5. Whenreturningtosinglescreen,displaythe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTUE]screenonemoretimeandselect[OFF]inthe[SUBINPUT]screenoftheStep3.

TIP:• Duringdual-screenprojection,iftheselectedinputisnotsupportedbythesub-screen,thesub-screenwillappearasablack

screen.

Page 87: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

70

Switching the main display with the sub-display and vice versa1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[PICTURESWAP]usingthe▼/▲ buttons and then press the ENTER button.

Displaythescreenforswitchingthedisplaypositions.

3. Select[ON]usingthe▼ button and then press the ENTER button.

Thevideoofthemaindisplaywillswitchwiththatofthesub-display.

Whenturned“OFF” Whenturned“ON”

Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo

ThesignaloutputfromtheHDMIOUTterminaldoesnotchangeevenifthedisplaypositionsareswitched.

4. Press the menu button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

Page 88: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

71

Restrictions

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledonlyforthemaindisplay.

• Visualadjustments

• Videomagnification/demaginificationusingthepartialD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttons.

However,magnification/demaginificationisuptotheboundarysetin[PICTUREBYPICTURE].

• TESTPATTERN

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledforboththemaindisplayandsub-display.Theseoperationscannotbeap-pliedindividually.

• Momentarydeletionofvideo

• Videopause

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhena3Dvideoisbeingdisplayed.

• Whenusingthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]function,[CLOSEDCAPTION]and[DYNAMICCONTRAST]canbeused.

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhenthesignalinputhasaresolutionof1920×1200ormore.

• TheHDMIOUTterminalhasarepeaterfunction.Theoutputresolutionislimitedbythemaximumresolutionoftheconnectedmonitorandprojector.

Page 89: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

72

❸ Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]Ahighresolutionvideocanbeprojectedonanevenbiggerscreenbycombiningmultipleprojectorsontheleft,right,topandbottom.Thisprojectorisequippedwithan“EDGEBLENDINGFunction”thatmakestheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenindistinguishable.

NOTE:• Forprojectorthrowdistances,referto“Throwdistanceandscreensize”onpage171.• BeforeperformingtheEdgeBlendingfunction,placetheprojectorinthecorrectpositionsothattheimagebecomessquarein

theappropriatesize,andthenmakeopticaladjustments(lensshift,focus,andzoom).• Adjustthebrightnessofeachprojectorusing[ADJUST]under[LIGHTMODE].Afteradjustingthebrightness,youcankeepthe

setbrightnesslevelbyturningONthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode.Inaddition,use[REF.WHITEBALANCE]toadjustthe[CONTRAST]and[BRIGHTNESS].

BeforeexplaininguseoftheEdgeBlendingfunctionThissectionexplainsthecasefor“Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside”.Asshown,theprojectedimageontheleftisreferredtoas“ProjectorA”andtheprojectedimageontherightisreferredto“ProjectorB”.Unlessotherwisespecifiedhereinafter,the“projector”isusedtomeanbothAandB.

Example: Placing two projectors side by side

EdgeBlendingarea

Projectedarea Projectedarea

ProjectorA ProjectorB

Page 90: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

73

Preparation:• Turnontheprojectoranddisplayasignal.• Whenperformingsettingsoradjustmentsusingtheremotecontrol,enablethe[CONTROLID]soasnottoactivatetheotherprojectors.(→page125)

Setting the overlap of projection screens

①Enable[EDGEBLENDING].1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[EDGEBLENDING].

The[EDGEBLENDING]screenwillbedisplayed.Alignthecursorwith[MODE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.Themodescreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[MODE]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThisenablestheEdgeBlendingfunction.Thefollowingmenuitemsareavailable:

[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]

4. Select[RIGHT]forProjectorAand[LEFT]forProjectorB.

PresstheENTERbutton.

Thefollowingitemsareavailable:

[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION]

Page 91: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

74

5. Select[CONTROL]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Each[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]hasitsown[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION].

• ForProjectorA,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[LEFT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].SimilarlyforProjectorB,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[RIGHT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].

②Adjust[RANGE]and[POSITION]todetermineanareaofoverlappededgesofimagesprojected from each projector.Turningon[MARKER]willdisplaymarkersinmagentaandgreen.Themagentamarkerisusedfor[RANGE]andgreenonefor[POSITION].

[RANGE](Determineanareaofoverlappededgesofimages.)

[POSITION](Determinethepositionofoverlappededgesofimages.)Greenmarker

Turnon[RIGHT]

Magentamarker

Turnon[LEFT]

Magentamarker

* The2screensareseparatedinthediagramforexplanatorypurposes.

Page 92: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

75

1 Adjust[RANGE].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoadjusttheoverlappedarea.

TIP:• Adjusttooverlaponeprojector’markerwiththeotherprojector’smarker.

2 Adjust[POSITION].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoalignoneedgewiththeotheredgeofoverlappedimages.

TIP:• Whendisplayingasignalwithadifferentresolution,performtheEdgeBlendingfunctionfromthestart.• Settingof[MARKER]willnotbesavedandreturnto[OFF]whentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Todisplayorhidethemarkerwhiletheprojectorisrunning,turnonoroff[MARKER]fromthemenu.

Page 93: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

76

Black Level AdjustmentThisadjuststheblackleveloftheoverlappingareaandthenon-overlappingareaofthemulti-screen(EDGEBLENDING).Adjustthebrightnesslevelifyoufeelthedifferenceistoolarge.

NOTE: Thisfunctionisenabledonlywhen[MODE]isturnedon.Adjustableareavariesdependingonwhatcombinationof[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT]and[RIGHT]areturnedon.

Example:AdjustingtheBlackLevelwhenplacingtwoprojectorssidebyside

Widthofoverlap

Adjust[CENTER] Adjust[CENTER]

ProjectorA’simage

ProjectorB’simage

Adjust[CENTER-RIGHT] Adjust[CENTER-LEFT]

1. Turnon[MODE]

2. Select[BLACKLEVEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thescreenwillswitchtotheblackleveladjustmentscreen.

3. Use the ▼ or ▲ button to select an item and use the ◀ or ▶ to adjust the black level.

Dothisfortheotherprojectorifnecessary.

Page 94: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

4. Multi-Screen Projection

77

9-segmentedportionsforBlackLeveladjustmentThecenterprojector

Thisfunctionadjuststhebrightnesslevelof9-segmentedportionsforthecenterprojectorand4-segmentedportionsfortheleftbottomprojectorasshownbelow.

TOP-LEFT

BOTTOM-LEFT

CENTER-LEFT

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

BOTTOM-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

CENTER

CENTER

BOTTOM-CENTER

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

TIP:• Thenumberofblackleveldivisionscreens(maximumofninedivisions)changesdependingonthenumberofedgeblending

positionsselected(top,bottom,right,left).Inaddition,whenthetop/bottomandleft/rightendsareselected,thecornerdivisionscreen appears.

• Theedgeblendingwidthisthewidthsetintherangeandthecornerisformedbytheintersectingareaofthetop/bottomendsorleft/rightends.

• The[BLACKLEVEL]canbeadjustedtomakeitbrighteronly.

Page 95: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

78

5. Using On-Screen Menu❶ Using the Menus

NOTE:Theon-screenmenumaynotbedisplayedcorrectlydependingoninputsignalandtheprojectorsetting.

1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.

NOTE:Thecommandssuchas ENTER,EXIT,▲▼, ◀▶inthebottomshowavailablebuttonsforyouroperation.

2. Press the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemorthefirsttab.

4. Use the ▲▼ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set.

You can use the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.

5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.

6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.

Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.

7. Repeat steps 2-6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projec-tor cabinet to quit the menu display.

NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.

8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.

Page 96: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

79

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❷ Menu ElementsSlidebar

Solidtriangle

Menumode

Tab

Radiobutton

HIGHsymbol

LIGHTMODEsymbol

Menuwindowsordialogboxestypicallyhavethefollowingelements:

Highlight ����������������������������� Indicates the selected menu or item� Solid triangle ���������������������� Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active� Tab �������������������������������������� Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�Source �������������������������������� Indicates the currently selected source�Menu mode ������������������������ Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�Off Timer remaining time ���� Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�Slide bar ����������������������������� Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�LIGHT MODE symbol ���������� Indicates [LIGHT MODE] is set�Key Lock symbol ���������������� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�Thermometer symbol ��������� Indicates the [LIGHT MODE] is forcibly set to [ECO] mode because the internal temperature is too

high�HIGH symbol ���������������������� Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH] mode�

Source

Availablebuttons

Thermometersymbol

KeyLocksymbol

OffTimerremainingtime

Highlight

Page 97: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

80

5. Using On-Screen Menu

* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.*4 The[INPUTRESOLLUTION]itemisavailablewheneitherCOMPUTERorBNCsignalisselectedastheinputterminal.

•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.❸ List of Menu ItemsSomemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.Menu Item Default Options

INPUT

HDMI *DisplayPort *BNC *BNC(CV) *BNC(Y/C) *COMPUTER *HDBaseTSLOTENTRY LISTTEST PATTERN

ADJUST

PICTURE

MODE STANDARD STANDARD, PROFESSIONAL

PRESET * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�, EDGE BLENDING

DETAIL SETTINGS

GENERAL

REFERENCE * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�, EDGE BLENDING

GAMMA CORRECTION*1

SELECT DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAILREFERENCE

SCREEN SIZE*2 * LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALLCOLOR TEMPERATURE*3 *DYNAMIC CONTRAST * OFF, ONBrilliant Color * OFF, MEDIUM, HIGH

WHITE BALANCECONTRAST R 0CONTRAST G 0CONTRAST B 0BRIGHTNESS R 0BRIGHTNESS G 0BRIGHTNESS B 0

COLOR CORRECTION

RED HUE 0SATURATION

GREEN HUE 0SATURATION

BLUE HUE 0SATURATION

YELLOW HUE 0SATURATION

MAGENTA HUE 0SATURATION

CYAN HUE 0SATURATIONCONTRAST 0BRIGHTNESS 0SHARPNESS 0COLOR 0HUE 0RESET

IMAGE OPTIONS

CLOCK *PHASE *HORIZONTAL *VERTICAL *BLANKING * TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTOVERSCAN AUTO AUTO, 0[%], 5[%], 10[%]

ASPECT RATIO

AUTO (COMPUTER) AUTO, 4:3, 5:4, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, FULL, NATIVE

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) AUTO, 4:3, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, ZOOM

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) AUTO, 4:3 WINDOW, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, FULL

INPUT RESOLUTION*4 * –

Page 98: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

81

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

ADJUST

VIDEO

NOISE REDUCTIONRANDOM NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHMOSQUITO NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHBLOCK NR OFF OFF, LOW

DEINTERLACE NORMAL NORMAL, MOVIE, STILLCONTRAST ENHANCEMENT

MODE AUTO OFF, AUTO, NORMALGAIN

SIGNAL TYPE AUTO AUTO, RGB, COMPONENTVIDEO LEVEL AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, ENHANCED, SUPER WHITE

3D SETTINGS FORMAT AUTOAUTO, OFF(2D), FRAME PACKING, SIDE BY SIDE(HALF), SIDE BY SIDE(FULL), TOP AND BOTTOM, FRAME ALTERNATIVE, LINE ALTERNATIVE

L/R INVERT OFF OFF, ON

LENS MEMORY

STOREMOVERESET

DISPLAY

PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE

SUB INPUT OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

MODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTUREPICTURE SWAP OFF OFF, ON

PIP SETTING

START POSITION TOP-LEFT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHTHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITIONSIZE MEDIUM LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL

BORDER

GEOMETRIC CORRECTION

KEYSTONE

HORIZONTALVERTICALTILTTHROW RATIO

CORNERSTONE TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

HORIZONTAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

VERTICAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

PINCUSHION

TOPBOTTOMLEFTRIGHT

PC TOOL OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3RESET

EDGE BLENDING

MODE OFF OFF, ON

TOP

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BOTTOM

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

LEFT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

RIGHT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BLACK LEVEL

TOP-LEFTTOP-CENTERTOP-RIGHTCENTER-LEFTCENTERCENTER-RIGHTBOTTOM-LEFTBOTTOM-CENTERBOTTOM-RIGHT

Page 99: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

82

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

DISPLAY MULTI SCREEN

WHITE BALANCE

MODE OFF OFF, ONCONTRAST WCONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS WBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B

PICTURE SETTING

MODE OFF OFF, ZOOM, TILING

ZOOM

HORIZONTAL ZOOMVERTICAL ZOOMHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITION

TILING

WIDTH 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHEIGHT 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHORIZONTAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNITVERTICAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

SETUP

MENU

LANGUAGE ENGLISH

ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMINORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी, ไทย,

, 繁體中文COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROMEINPUT DISPLAY ON OFF, ONMESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF, ON

DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC

INSTALLA-TION(1)

ORIENTATION AUTO AUTO, DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT

SCREEN TYPE FREE FREE, 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREEN

WALL COLOR OFF OFF, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK

FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, HIGH

LIGHT MODELIGHT MODE NORMAL NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS OFF OFF, ONADJUST 20–100%

REF� WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B

3D GLASSES DLP® Link DLP® Link, OTHERS

INSTALLA-TION(2)

SHUTTER SETTINGS

POWER ON SHUTTER OPEN OPEN, CLOSEPICTURE MUTE SHUTTER OPEN OPEN, CLOSEFADE IN TIME 0–10 sec�FADE OUT TIME 0–10 sec�

REF� LENS MEMORY

PROFILE 1 1, 2STOREMOVERESETLOAD BY SIGNAL OFF ON, OFFFORCED MUTE OFF ON, OFF

LENS CALIBRATION

LENS POSITION HOMETYPE NP39ML

Page 100: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

83

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP CONTROL

TOOLS

ADMINISTRA-TOR MODE

MENU MODE ADVANCED ADVANCED, BASICNOT SAVE SETTING VALUES OFF OFF, ONNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PROGRAM TIMER

ENABLE OFF OFF, ON

SETTINGS

EDIT

ACTIVE OFF, ON

DAY SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, EVERY DAY

TIMEFUNCTION POWER, INPUT, LIGHT MODEADVANCED SETTINGSPOWER OFF OFF, ON

INPUT HDMI HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

LIGHT MODE NORMAL NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2REPEAT OFF OFF, ON

DELETEUPDOWNBACK

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

TIME ZONE SETTIMGS

GMT

-12:00, -11:30, -11:00, -10:30, -10:00, -09:30, -09:00, -08:30, -08:00, -07:30, -07:00, -06:30, -06:00, -05:30, -05:00, -04:30, -04:00, -03:30, -03:00, -02:30, -02:00, -01:30, -01:00, -00:30, 00:00, +00:30, +01:00, +01:30, +02:00, +02:30, +03:00, +03:30, +04:00, +04;30, +05:00, +05:30, +06:00, +06:30, +07:00, +07:30, +08:00, +08:30, +09:00, +09:30, +10:00, +10:30, +11:00, +11:30, +12:00, +12:30, +13:00

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

DATE MM/DD/YYYYTIME HH:MMINTERNET TIME SERVER OFF OFF, ON

IP ADDRESSUPDATE

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS

ENABLE OFF OFF, ONMON(START) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(START) FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, LASTSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(START)MON(EXIT) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(EXIT)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(EXIT)TIME DIFFERENCE +01:00, +00:30, -00:30, -01:00

MOUSE (Note) Cannot be used for this device�CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ONSECURITY OFF OFF, ONCOMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps

CONTROL ID CONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON

REMOTE SENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK, HDBase-T

Page 101: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

84

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

NETWORK SETTINGS

WIRED LAN

PROFILES DISABLE, PROFILE 1, PROFILE 2DHCP OFF, ONIP ADDRESS 192�168�0�10SUBNET MASK 255�255�255�0GATEWAY 192�168�0�1AUTO DNS OFF, ONDNS CONFIGURATIONRECONNECT

PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME PX803UL Series

DOMAIN HOST NAME necpjDOMAIN NAME

ALERT MAIL

ALERT MAIL OFF, ONHOST NAMEDOMAIN NAMESENDER'S ADDRESSSMTP SERVER NAMERECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 1RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 2RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 3TEST MAIL

NETWORK SERVICE

HTTP SERVER

NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PJLink NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

AMX BEACON OFF, ON

CRESTRON

ROOMVIEW OFF, ONCRESTRON CONTROL (ENABLE, CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS, IP ID)

Extron XTP OFF, ON

SOURCE OPTIONS

AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE

COLOR SYSTEM BNC(VIDEO) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3�58, NTSC4�43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAMBNC(Y/C) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3�58, NTSC4�43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM

DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

CLOSED CAPTION OFF OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4, TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4

BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGO

POWER OPTIONS

STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, NETWORK STANDBYDIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ONAUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOTAUTO POWER OFF 1:00 OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:15, 0:20, 0:30, 1:00OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

SLOT POWER PROJECTOR ON ON OFF, ONPROJECTOR STANDBY ENABLE DISABLE, ENABLE

RESETCURRENT SIGNALALL DATAALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)

Page 102: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

85

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

INFO�

USAGE TIME LIGHT HOURS USEDTOTAL CARBON SAVINGS

SOURCE(1)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�

SOURCE(2)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

SOURCE(3)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�

SOURCE(4)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

WIRED LAN

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS

VERSION(1)FIRMWAREDATASUB-CPU

OTHERS

DATE TIMEPROJECTOR NAMEMODEL NO�SERIAL NUMBERCONTROL ID (when [CONTROL ID] is set)

HDBaseT

SIGNAL QUALITYOPERATION MODELINK STATUSHDMI STATUS

Page 103: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

86

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INPUT]

HDMIThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMIINterminal.

DisplayPortThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal.

BNCThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtothevideoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

BNC(CV)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(CV)videoinputterminal.(Thisprojectsthecompositevideosignal.)

BNC(Y/C)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(Y/C)videoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheS-videosignal.)

COMPUTERThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

HDBaseTProjectingtheHDBaseTorWIREDLANsignal.

SLOTProjectsthepictureviatheoptionalboard(soldseparately)insertedintotheSLOT.

ENTRY LISTDisplaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.

TEST PATTERNClosesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.Selectthepatternusingthe◀▶buttons.

Page 104: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

87

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Entry ListWhenanysourceadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntryList.The(adjust-mentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.Upto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredintheEntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.

Displaying the Entry list1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[INPUT].

TheINPUTlistwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheENTRYLISTwindowswillbedisplayed.

IftheENTRYLISTwindowisnotdisplayed,switchthemenuto[ADVANCED].

Toswitchthemenubetween[ADVANCED]and[BASIC],select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[TOOLS]→[ADMIN-ISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE].(→page119)

Page 105: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

88

5. Using On-Screen Menu

EnteringthecurrentlyprojectedsignalintotheEntryList[STORE]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select any number.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

CallingupasignalfromtheEntryList[LOAD]Pressthe▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.

EditingasignalfromtheEntryList[EDIT]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to edit.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[EDIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheEditwindowwillbedisplayed.

SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.INPUT Theinputterminalcanbechanged.SwitchingbetweenHDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/

BNC(Y/C)/Computer/HDBaseT/SLOTispossible.LOCK Setso that theselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen [ALLDELETE] isexecuted.The

changesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.

3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE:Theinputterminalcannotbechangedtothecurrentlyprojectedsignal.

Page 106: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

89

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CuttingasignalfromtheEntryList[CUT]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to delete.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[CUT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThesignalwillbedeletedfromtheEntryListandthedeletedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebottomoftheEntryList.

NOTE:• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.

TIP:• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.

CopyingandpastingasignalfromtheEntryList[COPY]/[PASTE]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to copy.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[COPY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThecopiedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebottomoftheEntryList.

3. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the list.

4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal.

5. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[PASTE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Dataontheclipboardwillbepastedtothesignal.

DeletingallthesignalsfromtheEntryList[ALLDELTE]

1. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ALLDELETE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.

Page 107: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

90

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST][PICTURE]

[MODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.

STANDARD ������������ Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 8)PROFESSIONAL ����� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�

NOTE: • When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[MODE]cannotbeselected.

[PRESET]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.Thereareeightfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuseradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET8].

HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color valuesDICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�EDGE BLENDING ��� Recommended for edge blending�

NOTE: • The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-

ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA). Thestandardspecifieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.• Adjustmentmaynotworkdependingoninputsignal.

Page 108: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

91

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[DETAILSETTINGS]

[GENERAL]StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET8].First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERATURE].

HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�EDGE BLENDING ��� Recommended for edge blending�

SelectingGammaCorrectionMode[GAMMACORRECTION]Eachmodein[SELECT]correctscolortoneofprojectedimageandisrecommendedfor:

DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�

In[REFERENCE],itadjustscorrectedvalueforprojectedimage.Highervaluemeansdeepercorrection.

NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

Page 109: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

92

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.

LARGE ������������������� For screen size of 150"MEDIUM ���������������� For screen size of 100"SMALL ������������������� For screen size of 50"

NOTE: • Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].• Correctionvalueischangeddependingonprojectionimages.

AdjustingColorTemperature[COLORTEMPERATURE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.Avaluebetween5000Kand10500Kcanbesetina500Kunit.

NOTE: • When[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.• When[PRESENTATION]isselectedin[REFERENCE],theselectablerangefor[COLORTEMPERATURE]is3levels,0,1,and3.

AdjustingBrightnessandContrast[DYNAMICCONTRAST]If[ON]isselected,themostoptimalcontrastratioisusedaccordingtothepicture.

NOTE:• Dependingontheconditions,projectorsettingssuchas[DYNAMICCONTRAST]maynotbeabletobeselected.

[BrilliantColor]Selectsthebrightnessofthecolorwhite.Selectingoptionsfrom[MEDIUM]to[HIGH]increasesthebrightnessofthecolorwhite.

NOTE:• Ifunder[REFERENCE],[HIGH-BRIGHT]or[PRESENTATION]areselected,[BrilliantColor]cannotbechanged.

AdjustingWhiteBalance[WHITEBALANCE]Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.

[COLORCORRECTION]Correctsthecolorforallsignals.Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.

RED HUE +Direction Magentadirection−Direction Yellowdirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

GREEN HUE +Direction Yellowdirection−Direction Cyandirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

BLUE HUE +Direction Cyandirection−Direction Magentadirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

YELLOW HUE +Direction Reddirection−Direction Greendirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

Page 110: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

93

5. Using On-Screen Menu

MAGENTA HUE +Direction Bluedirection−Direction Reddirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

CYAN HUE +Direction Greendirection−Direction Bluedirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

[CONTRAST]Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.

[BRIGHTNESS]Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.

[SHARPNESS]Controlsthedetailoftheimage.

[COLOR]Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.

[HUE]Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.

Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE

RGBsystemof“COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes No No

COMPONENTsystemof“COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

CompositeVideo/S-Video Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable

NOTE:• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[SHARPNESS],[COLOR]and[HUE]cannotbeadjusted.

[RESET]Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselectedwillnotbereset.

Page 111: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

94

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[IMAGE OPTIONS]

AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.

CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�

PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�

NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.

Page 112: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

95

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.

• Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.

• Theadjustments for [CLOCK], [PHASE], [HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestored inmemoryfor thecurrentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.

Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]andresettheadjustments.

[BLANKING]Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.

SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.

Projectedimage

Overscanedby10%

NOTE: • The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable: -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].

Page 113: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

96

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingtheAspectRatio[ASPECTRATIO]Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’svertical:horizontalaspectratio.Selectthescreentype(4:3screen,16:9screenor16:10screen)inthe[INSTALLATION(1)]beforesettingtheaspectratio.(→page115)Theprojectorautomaticallyidentifiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.

For Computer signal

ForComponent/Video/S-Videosignals

Whenthescreentypeissetto4:3 Whenthescreentypeissetto16:9or16:10

Resolution AspectRatioVGA 640×480 4:3SVGA 800×600 4:3XGA 1024×768 4:3WXGA 1280×768 15:9WXGA 1280×800 16:10HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10SXGA 1280×1024 5:4SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3WXGA++ 1600×900 16:9UXGA 1600×1200 4:3WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:10FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10WQXGA 2560×1600 16:10

Options Function

AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.

4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.

5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio

16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio

15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio

16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio

Page 114: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

97

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Options Function

NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignalhasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page3)Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.

LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstofitthescreen.

WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.

FULL Projecttofullscreensize.

TIP:• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect

ratioforavidesource. Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formoviefilm.• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.

[INPUTRESOLUTION]TheresolutionisassignedautomaticallywhentheresolutionoftheinputsignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminalorBNCvideoinputterminal(analogRGB)cannotbedistinguished.

Page 115: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

98

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[VIDEO]

UsingNoiseReduction[NOISEREDUCTION]Whenprojectingavideoimage,youcanusethe[NOISEREDUCTION]functiontoreducethescreennoise(roughnessanddistortion).Thisdeviceisequippedwiththreetypesofnoisereductionfunctions.Selectthefunctionaccordingtothetypeofnoise.Dependingonthenoiselevel,thenoisereductioneffectcanbesetto[OFF],[LOW],[MEDIUM]or[HIGH].[NOISEREDUCTION]canbeselectedforSDTV,HDTVsignalandcomponentsignalinput.

RANDOM NR ��������� Reduces flickering random noise in an image� MOSQUITO NR ������ Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu-ray playback�BLOCK NR ������������� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns by selecting ON�

SelectingInterlacedProgressiveConversionProcessMode[DEINTERLACE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.

NORMAL ���������������� Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image� Please select [MOVIE] if there are any obvious jitter and noises�

MOVIE ������������������� Select when projecting moving images� This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise�STILL ��������������������� Select when projecting static images� The video will flicker when a moving image is projected�

NOTE:ThisfunctionisnotavailablewithRGBsignals.

[CONTRASTENHANCEMENT]Usingthecharacteristicsofthehumaneye,apicturequalitywithasenseofcontrastandresolutionisachieved.

OFF ������������������������ Suite vision is switched off�AUTO ��������������������� Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function�NORMAL ���������������� Adjust the gain manually�

Page 116: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

99

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SIGNALTYPE]SelectionofRGBandcomponentsignals.Normally,thisissetto[AUTO].Pleasechangethesettingifthecoloroftheimageremainsunnatural.

AUTO ��������������������� Automatically distinguishes RGB and component signals�RGB ����������������������� Switches to the RGB input�COMPONENT ��������� Switches to the component signal input�

[VIDEOLEVEL]SelectionofthevideosignallevelwhenconnectinganexternaldevicetotheHDMIINterminal,DisplayPortinputterminal,andHDBaseTinputterminaloftheprojector.

AUTO ��������������������� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to [NORMAL” or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�

NORMAL ���������������� This disables the enhanced mode�ENHANCED ������������ This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�SUPER WHITE ������� The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic�

Page 117: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

100

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3D SETTINGS]

Pleasereferto“3-9Projecting3Dvideos”(→page48)fortheoperation.

FORMATSelectthe3Dvideoformat(recording/transmissionformat).Selecttomatchthe3Dbroadcastand3Dmedia.Nor-mally,[AUTO]isselected.Pleaseselectthe3Dinputsignalformatwhenthe3Ddetectionsignaloftheformatcannotbedistinguished.

L/RINVERTInvertthedisplayorderoftheleftandrightvideos.Select[ON]ifyoufeeluncomfortablewiththe3Ddisplaywhen[OFF]isselected.

Page 118: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

101

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Lens Memory Function [LENS MEMORY]

ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluesforeachinputsignalwhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFO-CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.

STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory for each input signal�MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted values to the current signal�RESET �������������������� Returns the adjusted values to the last condition�

NOTE:• LensmemoryadjustmentswillbeautomaticallyregisteredtheENTRYLIST.Theselensmemoryadjustmentscanbeloadedfrom

theENTRYLIST.(→ page 87) Notethatperforming[CUT]or[ALLDELETE]intheENTRYLISTwilldeletelensmemoryadjustmentsaswellassourceadjust-

ments.Thisdeletionwillnottakeeffectuntilotheradjustmentsisloaded.• Forstoringeachadjustmentoflensshift,zoomandfocusascommonvalueforallinputsignal,storethemasreferencelens

memory.

Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[LENSMEMORY]:1. Project the connected device signal you want to adjust.

2. Adjusttheprojectingimageofposition,sizeandfocusbytheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITION,ZOOM+/−,andFOCUS+/−buttons.

• Adjustmentcanbeperformedbytheremotecontrol.Pleasereferto“AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition”onpage22.

• Slightadjustmentbymovingtheprojectorpositionandbythetiltfootisnotsubjectof[LENSMEMORY].

3.Movethecursoron[STORE]andpressENTER.

4.Movethecursoron[YES]andpressENTER.

Page 119: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

102

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Duringprojection,iftheadjustedvaluesforaninputsignalhavebeensaved,thelenswillshift.Ifnot,thelenswillshiftaccordingtotheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[REF.LENSMEMORY][PROFILE]number.

Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(2)]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]and

press the ENTER button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillmovethelensautomaticallytothepositionatthetimeofsourceselectionaccordingtotheadjustedvalues.

NOTE: • TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjusted

valuesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelensshift,zoomandfocustoproducethebestpossibleimage.

Page 120: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

103

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [DISPLAY][PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

SUBINPUTSelecttheinputsignaltobedisplayedinthesub-display.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page68)fordetailsontheoperation.

MODESelecteitherPIPorPICTUREBYPICTUREwhenswitchingto2-screendisplay.

PICTURE SWAPThevideosinthemaindisplayandsub-displaywillbeswitched.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page70)fordetails.

PIP SETTINGSelectthedisplayposition,positionadjustmentandsizeofthesub-displayinthePIPscreen.

START POSITION ��� Selection of the display position of the sub-display when switching to the PIP screen�HORIZONTAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the horizontal direction� The respective corners will serve

as reference points�VERTICAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the vertical direction� The respective corners will serve as

reference points�SIZE ����������������������� Select the display size of the sub-display�

Page 121: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

104

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIP:Thehorizontalpositionandverticalpositionaretheamountofmovementfromthereferencepoints.Forexample,whenTOP-LEFTisadjusted,thepositionisdisplayedwiththesameamountofmovementevenifdisplayedwithotherstartingpositions.Themaximumamountofmovementishalftheresolutionoftheprojector.

ReferencepointAdjustusingthehorizon-talposition

Sub-display Maindisplay

Referencepoint

Adjustusingtheverticalposition

TOP-LEFT TOP-RIGHT

BOTTOM-LEFT BOTTOM-RIGHT

ReferencepointReferencepoint

BORDERSelectthedisplayboundaryofthemaindisplayandsub-displayofthe[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screen.

Displayboundary

Maindisplay Sub-displayMaindisplay Sub-display MaindisplaySub-display

TIP:• 6stepscanbeselectedonthisprojector.

Page 122: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

105

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]

KEYSTONEDisplaythetrapezoidcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Todisplaythe[KEYSTONE]screen,select→[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[KEYSTONE]intheon-screenmenu.The[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screencanalsobedisplayedbypressing the3DREFORMbuttonontheremotecontrol.

HORIZONTAL ��������� Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the screen�

VERTICAL �������������� Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to the screen�

TILT ����������������������� Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction using the lens shift�

THROW RATIO ������� Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used�

Modelnameoflensunit

Adjustmentrange

NP16FL 7–8NP17ZL 12–18NP18ZL 17–23NP19ZL 21–37NP20ZL 34–55NP21ZL 50–85NP31ZL 7–10NP39ML 4

NOTE:• Whenpowerissuppliedtothedevice,theadjustmentvalueofthe[KEYSTONE]usedpreviouslyisretainedevenifthegradient

ofthedeviceischanged.• Whenclearingtheadjustmentvalueof[KEYSTONE],pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Whensettingother[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]functions,the[KEYSTONE]menucannotbeselected.Whenperformingtrapezoidal

correction,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoresecondstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].• Aselectricalcorrection iscarriedoutby [KEYSTONE], thebrightnessmaybe reducedor thescreenqualitymaydeteriorate

sometimes.

Page 123: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

106

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CORNERSTONEDisplaythe4-pointcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Pleasereferto“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page42)fordetailsontheoperation.

HORIZONTALCORNER/VERTICALCORNERDistortioncorrectionforcornerprojectionsuchaswallsurfaces.

HORIZONTAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�VERTICAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�

NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangleas

thedeteriorationintheimagequalityincreasesasthedistortionadjustmentvolumegetslarger.• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweentheupperandlowerorleftandright

sidesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscorners.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedforprojectionscuttingacrosscornersastheimagewillgooutoffocus.

Page 124: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

107

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Adjustment method1. Alignthecursorwiththe[HORIZONTALCORNER]or[VERTICALCORNER]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORREC-

TION]menuandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶ buttons to align the cursor (yellow box) with the target adjustment point and then press the ENTER button.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentpointwillgobacktobeingacursor(yellowbox).

Explanationofscreentransition

• Theadjustmentpointsofthefourcorners(a,c,fandhinthedrawing)willmoveindependently.

• Thefollowingadjustmentpointsdifferatthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]and[VERTICALCORNER].

HORIZONTALCORNER:WhenPointbinthedrawingismoved,andtheuppersideandPointgaremoved,thelowersidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

VERTICALCORNER:WhenPointdinthedrawingismoved,andtheleftsideandPointearemoved,therightsidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

b

b c

d e

f g h

a c

d e

fg

h

PointbwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,b,c

PointgwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[VERTICALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

a

b

bc

cd

dee

f

f

g

gh

h

PointdwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,d,f

PointewillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

4. StartfromStep2onwardstoadjusttheotherpoints.

5. When the adjustment is completed, press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursorwiththe[EXIT]intheadjustment screen and then press theENTER button.

• Switchtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuscreen.

Page 125: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

108

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PINCUSHIONAdjustthecurvedistortionoftheprojectionscreen.

TOP ������������������������ Adjust the curve distortion of the upper edge of the projection screen�

BOTTOM ���������������� Adjust the curve distortion of the lower edge of the projection screen�

LEFT ���������������������� Adjust the curve distortion of the left edge of the projection screen�RIGHT �������������������� Adjust the curve distortion of the right edge of the projection

screen�

TOP

LEFT RIGHT

BOTTOM

PCTOOL(Forfuturesupport)Recallthegeometriccorrectiondatathatisregisteredintheprojectorbeforehand.Therearethreetypesofregistereddata.

NOTE:• KEYSTONE,CORNERSTONE,andPINCUSHIONcannotbeselectedwhensettingthegeometriccorrectionusingaPCtool.• Toclearthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]datathathasbeensetup,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarriedout ingeometriccorrection,thebrightnessmaybeaffectedandthepicturequalitymaybe

degraded.

RESETResettheadjustmentvaluethathasbeensetupinGEOMETRICCORRECTION(returntotheinitialvalue).

Page 126: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

109

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[EDGE BLENDING]

Thisadjuststheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenwhenprojectinghighresolutionvideosusingacombina-tionofseveralprojectorsintheup,down,leftandrightpositions.

MODEThisenablesordisablestheEDGEBLENDINGfunction.WhenMODEissettoON,theTOP,BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHTandBLACKLEVELsettingscanbeadjusted.

TOP/BOTTOM/LEFT/RIGHTThisselectstheEDGEBLENDINGlocationsontheleft,right,topandbottomonthescreen.Thefollowingsettingscanbeadjustedwhenanitemisselected.(→page73)

CONTROL �������������� Enable TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT and RIGHT functions�MARKER ���������������� Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position� When turned on, a

magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position will be displayed�

RANGE ������������������� Adjust the range (width) of the edge blending�POSITION �������������� Adjust the display position of the edge blending�

BLACKLEVELDividethescreenintoninepartsandkeeptheblackleveluniformforeachprojector.TheninedivisionsscreensareTOP-LEFT,TOP-CENTER,TOP-RIGHT,CENTER-LEFT,CENTER,CENTER-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-CENTERandBOTTOM-RIGHT.(→page76)

Page 127: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

110

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[MULTI SCREEN]

WHITEBALANCEThisadjuststhewhitebalanceforeachprojectorwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Thiscanbeadjustedwhen[MODE]issetto[ON].

BRIGHTNESS W, BRIGHTNESS R, BRIGHTNESS G, BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ Adjusting the black color of the video�CONTRAST W, CONTRAST R, CONTRAST G, CONTRAST B ������������������������������ Adjusting the white color of the video�

PICTURE SETTINGThissetsthedivisionconditionwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Pleasereferto“4.Multi-ScreenProjection”(→page64)fordetails.

MODE OFF Usetheprojectorinastandalonestate.

ZOOM Thisadjuststhepositionandwidthofthevideoareathatyouwishtodivide.Theedgeblendingwidthwillalsobeautomaticallysettothatwidth.

TILING Thisassignsthedividedscreenstotheprojectors.Theedgeblendingfunctionwillalsobesetautomatically.

ZOOM HORIZONTALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALPO-SITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

TILING WIDTH Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedhorizontally.

HEIGHT Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedvertically.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromtheleftamongthosearrangedhorizontally.

VERTICALPO-SITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromthetopamongthosearrangedvertically.

Page 128: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

111

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Conditions for using tiling• Alltheprojectorsneedtofulfilthefollowingconditions.• Thepanelsizemustbethesame• Theprojectionscreensizemustbethesame• Theleftandrightendsortopandbottomendsoftheprojectionscreenmustbeconsistent.• Thesettingsfortheleftandrightedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame• Thesettingsforthetopandbottomedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame Ifthetilingconditionsaresatisfied,thevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionwillbeautomaticallyextractedandprojected. Ifthetilingconditionsarenotsatisfied,adjustthevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionusingthezoomfunction.• AssignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.• Setthe“ColorSetting”and“DeepColorSetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner’smanualaccompanyingyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation. ConnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertothefirstprojector.ThenconnecttotheHDMIINinputterminalofthesecondandsubsequenttiledprojectors.

Tilingsettingexample)Numberofhorizontalunits=2,Numberofverticalunits=2

Horizontalorder=SecondunitVerticalorder=Firstunit

Page 129: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

112

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[MENU]

SelectingMenuLanguage[LANGUAGE]Youcanchooseoneof29languagesforon-screeninstructions.

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingMenuColor[COLORSELECT]Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.

TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[INPUTDISPLAY]ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasHDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,BNC(CV),BNC(Y/C),COMPUTER,HDBaseTtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.

Turningmessagesonandoff[MESSAGEDISPLAY]Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthesecuritylockiscanceled.

TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control

is pressed� (→ page 125)

Page 130: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

113

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3DCAUTIONMESSAGE]Thisselectswhethertodisplayacautionmessageornotwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo.ThedefaultconditionwhenshippedfromthefactoryisON.

OFF ������������������������ The 3D caution message screen will not be displayed�ON ������������������������� The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video� Press the ENTER button

to cancel the message�• Themessagewilldisappearautomaticallyafter60secondsorwhenotherbuttonsarepressed.Ifitdisap-

pears automatically, the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video�

SelectingMenuDisplayTime[DISPLAYTIME]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.Thepresetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-torypreset.

Page 131: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

114

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION(1)]

SelectingProjectorOrientation[ORIENTATION]Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.

NOTE: • Pleaseconsultthedealerifyourequirespecialinstallationservicese.g.whenmountingtheprojectortoaceiling.Neverinstall

theprojectoronyourown.Thismayresultintheprojectorfallingdownandcausinginjurytopeople.

AUTO ��������������������� This automatically detects and projects the DESKTOP FRONT and CEILING FRONT�

NOTE:• TheDESKTOPREARandCEILINGREARwillnotbedetected.Pleaseselectmanually.

DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR

DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT

TIP:• CheckwhethertheautomaticDESKTOPFRONTisinstalledwithin±10degreesforfloorinstallationandwhethertheCEILING

FRONTiswithin±10degreesforceilinginstallation.Selectmanuallywhentheprojectionscreenisinverted.

Page 132: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

115

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingAspectRatioandPositionforScreen[SCREENTYPE]

Screentype Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.

FREE Theratiooftheliquidcrystalpanelisselected.Selectthiswhenprojectingmulti-screenand17:9screen(2K).

4:3screen Forascreenwitha4:3aspectratio

16:9screen Forascreenwitha16:9aspectratio

16:10screen Forascreenwitha16:10aspectratio

NOTE:• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.(→ page 96)

UsingtheWallColorCorrection[WALLCOLOR]

Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.

SelectingFanMode[FANMODE]FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.

MODE �������������������� Select mode for fan speed: AUTO and HIGH�AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed depending on the temperature and atmospheric pressure sensor�HIGH: The built-in fans run at a high speed� Select this option for continuously using the projector for several days�

NOTE: • Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

TIP:• When[HIGH]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon willbedisplayedatthebottomofthemenu.

Page 133: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

116

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[LIGHTMODE]Adjusting theenergysavingssettingsand thebrightnessofeachprojector inmulti-screenprojection.Forenergysavingssettings,seepage39“3-6.ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE[LIGHTMODE]”.

LIGHTMODE NORMAL Thelightmoduleluminance(brightness)willbecome100%andthescreenwillturnbright.

ECO1 Bycontrollingthebrightnessandfanspeedaccordingtotheselectedsetting,energycanbesavedandmotionnoiseandthepowerconsumptioncanbelowered.Canbeselectedwhen[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeissetto[OFF].ECO2

CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS

OFF [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modewillbecanceled.

ON Maintainsthebrightnessthatisineffectatthetime[ON]isselected.Unless[OFF]isse-lected,thesamesettingswillremainineffectevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Tore-adjustthebrightness,firstturnthissettingOFFbeforemakingfurtheradjustments.

NOTE:• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisafunctionusedtomaintainthebrightnessataconstant

level.Colorwillnotbefixed.

ADJUST Brightnesscanbeadjustedin1%incrementsfrom20to100%.Whenseveralprojectorsareusedformulti-screenprojection,thebrightnesscanbead-justedindividuallyoneachprojector.Theadjustmentiseffectivewhen[NORMAL][LIGHTMODE]isselectedand[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisturned[OFF].

TIP:• Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetect

brightnessandautomaticallyadjusttheoutput,therebymaintainingaconstantbrightnessthroughoutthelifeofthelightmodule. However,ifoutputisalreadyatitsmaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse. Forthisreason,whenusingmulti-screenprojection,itisrecommendedtoadjustthebrightnesstoaslightlylowerlevel,then

settingthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeto[ON].

[REF.WHITEBALANCE]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.

CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s white color�BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s black color�

3D GLASSESSelect3Dglassesmethod.

DLP® Link ������������� Select when using DLP® Link type 3D glasses�OTHERS ����������������� Select when using a non 3D emitter type glasses� It is required to connect the 3D emitter to the 3D SYNC

terminal of this projector� Please refer to page 50 about recommended items of 3D glasses and 3D emitter for this projector�

Page 134: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

117

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION(2)]

[SHUTTERSETTINGS]Enablinganddisablingthelensshutterfunction.YoucanalsosethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinandfadeoutwheneithertheSHUTTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbuttononthecabinetispressed.

POWERONSHUTTER

OPEN When thepower is turnedon, the lightsourcecomesonand thepicture isprojected.

CLOSE Thelightsourcedoesnotcomeonwhenthepoweristurnedon.WhentheSHUTTERbuttonispressed,theshutter isreleasedandthelightsourceisturnedon.

PICTUREMUTESHUTTER

OPEN Thelightsourceisstillonwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

CLOSE Thelightsourceturnsoffwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

FADEINTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinaftertheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.Thetimecanbesetfrom0to10secondsinincrementsof1second.

FADEOUTTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeoutaftertheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.Thetimecanbesetfrom0to10secondsinincrementsof1second.

Page 135: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

118

5. Using On-Screen Menu

UsingtheReferenceLensMemoryFunction[REF.LENSMEMORY]ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluescommontoallinputsourceswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Theadjustedvaluesstoredinmemorycanbeusedasareferencetothecurrent.

PROFILE ���������������� Select a stored [PROFILE] number�STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory as a reference�MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted reference values stored in [STORE] to the current signal�RESET �������������������� Reset selected [PROFILE] number [REF� LENS MEMORY] to the factory default settings�LOAD BY SIGNAL �� When you switch signals the lens will shift to the lens shift, zoom, and focus values for the selected [PRO-

FILE] number�If no adjusted values have been saved to [LENS MEMORY], the lens will apply [REF� LENS MEMORY] adjusted values� Alternatively, if no adjusted values have been saved to [REF� LENS MEMORY], the unit will return to factory default settings�

FORCED MUTE ������ To turn off the image during lens shift, select [YES]�

NOTE:• Adjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]willnotbereturnedtodefaultwhenperforming[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALLDATA]for

[RESET]fromthemenu.• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 58, 101)• When[PICTUREMUTESHUTTER]under[SHUTTERSETTINGS]is[ON],[FORCEDMUTE]willturnoffthelightsourceandstop

projection.(→ previouspage)

[LENSCALIBRATION]Theadjustmentrangeofthezoom,focus,andshiftofthe[LENSMEMORY]iscalibrated.Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.

[LENSPOSITION]Movethelensposition.

HOME �������������������� Set back the lens to the home position�TYPE ���������������������� Select this for using the lens unit NP39ML� The lens position will be adjusted to the appropriate position�

Page 136: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

119

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[CONTROL]

TOOLS

ADMINISTRATORMODEThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.

MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.(→page80)

NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES

Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�Clear this check box to save your projector settings�

NEWPASSWORD/CONFIRMPASS-WORD

Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

Page 137: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

120

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROGRAMTIMER

Thisoptionturnson/standbytheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsLIGHTmodeautomaticallyataspecifiedtime.

NOTE:• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 123) MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected. Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemain

powerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,itrequirestoset[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS]featureagain.

Setting a new program timer1. On the PROGRAM TIMER screen, use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROGRAMLIST]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Select a blank program number and press the ENTER button.

The[EDIT]screenwillbedisplayed.

3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.

ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-

FRI]� To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�

Page 138: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

121

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting

[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [INPUT] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [LIGHT MODE] will allow you to select [LIGHT MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-TINGS]�

ADVANCED SETTINGS ������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or LIGHT MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the

check mark�4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillcompletethesettings.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

6. Select[EXIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[TOOLS]screen.

NOTE:• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe

clearedautomaticallyandtheprogramwillbedisabled.• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted

untilthepoweroffbecomespossible.• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris

enabled.• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit

manuallysoasnottoleavetheprojectoronforalongperiodoftime.

Page 139: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

122

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Activating the program timer

1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.

Theselectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[ON]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

NOTE:• Whentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]havenotbeensetto[ON],theprogramwillnotbeexecutedevenifthe

[ACTIVE]itemsintheprogramlisthavebeenticked.• Evenwhentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]aresetto[ON],the[PROGRAMTIMER]willnotworkuntilthe[PRO-

GRAMTIMER]screenisclosed.

Changing the programmed settings

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.

3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogrammedsettingswillbechanged.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

Changing the order of programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.

Theorderoftheprogramswillbechanged.

Deleting the programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[DELETE].

3. Press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogramwillbedeleted.

Thiswillcompletedeletingtheprogram.

Page 140: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

123

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DATEANDTIMESETTINGS

Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.NOTE:Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabout2weeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisofffor2weeksormore,thebuilt-inclockwillcease.Ifthebuilt-inclockceases,setthedateandtimeagain.Thebuilt-inclockwillnotceasewhileinthestandbymode.

TIME ZONE SETTINGS �������������� Select your time zone�DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)� INTERNET TIME SERVER ��������� If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet

time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�UPDATE ������������������������������������ Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available

unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�

[MOUSE]Thisfunctioncannotbeusedinthisdevice.Itisusedforfutureexpansionpurposesonly.

Page 141: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

124

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DisablingtheCabinetButtons[CONTROLPANELLOCK]ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.

NOTE:• Howtocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK] Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]issetto[ON],presstheSOURCEbuttononthemainbodyforabout10secondstocancel

the[CONTROLPANELLOCK].

TIP:• Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.

EnablingSecurity[SECURITY]ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page45)

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingCommunicationSpeed[COMMUNICATIONSPEED]ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to115200bps.Thedefaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).

NOTE:• Select[38400bps]orlesswhenusingthesuppliedsoftwareprograms.• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 142: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

125

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingIDtotheProjector[CONTROLID]YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROLIDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogetherusingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.

CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting�

NOTE: • When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupport

theCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControl

ID.

Assigning or Changing the Control ID1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.

TheCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

IftheprojectorcanbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[AC-TIVE]willbedisplayed.IftheprojectorcannotbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[INACTIVE]willbedisplayed.Tooperatetheinactiveprojector,assignthecontrolIDusedfortheprojectorbyusingthefollowingprocedure(Step3).

3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET button on the remote control.

Example:

Toassign“3”,pressthe“3”buttonontheremotecontrol.

NoIDmeansthatalltheprojectorscanbeoperatedtogetherwithasingleremotecontrol.Toset“NoID”,enter“000”orpresstheCLEARbutton.

TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.4. Release the ID SET button.

TheupdatedCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE: • TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.• Ifoneofbuttonsof theremotecontrolwithoutbatteries ispressedaccidentally,

currentspecifiedIDwillbecleared.

Page 143: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

126

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOnorOffRemoteSensor[REMOTESENSOR]Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK,andHDBaseT.

NOTE:• TheremotecontroloftheprojectorwillnotbeabletoreceivesignalsifthepowersupplyoftheHDBaseTsupportedtransmission

deviceconnectedtotheprojectoronwhich“HDBaseT”settinghasbeenON.

TIP:• Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensorof

the projector, change another option.

Page 144: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

127

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[NETWORK SETTINGS]

Important:• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→ page

152)

TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection

To set up the projector for a LAN connection:Select[WIREDLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLAN.Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page128)To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number:Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page128)To connect a DHCP server:Turnon[DHCP]forwiredLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page128)To receive error messages via e-mail:Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page130)

Page 145: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

128

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WIRED LAN

PROFILES • Thesettingsforusingthebuilt-inEthernet/HDBaseTportintheprojectorcanberecordedintheprojectormemoryintwoways.• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor[DHCP]andtheotheroptions. Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Thiswillstoreyoursettingsinmemory.• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory: Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-FILES]list. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.• Select[DISABLE]whennotconnectingtoawiredLAN

DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmasknumberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

Upto12numericcharacters

DNSCONFIGURA-TION

SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.

Upto12numericcharacters

RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhavechanged[PROFILES].

Page 146: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

129

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROJECTORNAME

PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

DOMAINSetahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.

HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

Page 147: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

130

5. Using On-Screen Menu

ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.

Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�

Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:

Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PX803ULSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]

HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

SENDER'SAD-DRESS

Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

SMTPSERVERNAME

TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

RECIPIENT'SAD-DRESS1,2,3

Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.NOTE:• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceivean

Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient’s Address iscorrectlyset.

• Unless any one of the [SENDER'S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER'SNAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]isnotavailable.

• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting[TESTMAIL].

Page 148: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

131

5. Using On-Screen Menu

NETWORKSERVICE

HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

PJLink This option allows you to set a passwordwhen you use thePJLinkfeature.NOTE: • Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,

consultwithyourdealer.• WhatisPJLink? PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors

ofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardprotocol isestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-tion(JBMIA)in2005.

TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom

themenu.

Upto32alphanumericcharacters

AMXBEACON Turnonoroff fordetection fromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.

TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�

CRESTRON ROOMVIEW:TurnonoroffwhencontrollingtheprojectorfromyourPC.CRESTRONCONTROL:Turn on or offwhen controlling theprojectorfromyourcontroller.• CONTROLLERIPADDRESS:EnteryourIPaddressofCREST-RONSERVER.• IPID:EnteryourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

Upto12numericcharacters

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtrans-mitter.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 149: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

132

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE OPTIONS]

SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfornoiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].

OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-

MAL]is selected�

TIP:• Thedefaultsettingwhenshippedfromthefactoryis[NORMAL].• WhentheAUTOADJ.buttonispressed,thesame[FINE]adjustmentiscarriedout.

[COLORSYSTEM]ThisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheTVvideosignal,whichdiffersfromcountrytocountry(NTSC,PAL,etc.).Thisissetto[AUTO]byfactorydefault.Setthisiftheprojectorcannotidentifythesignalautomatically.

SelectingDefaultSource[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

LAST ���������������������� Set the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�AUTO ��������������������� Search for an active source in order of HDMI → DisplayPort → BNC → BNC(CV) → BNC(Y/C) → COMPUTER

→ HDBaseT → SLOT and displays the first found source�HDMI ��������������������� Display the digital source from the HDMI IN terminal every time the projector is turned on� DisplayPort ������������ Display the digital source from the DisplayPort IN terminal every time the projector is turned on� BNC ����������������������� Project the input signal from the BNC input terminalBNC(CV) ���������������� Project the input signal from the BNC(CV) input terminal�BNC(Y/C) ��������������� Project the input signal from the BNC(Y/C) input terminal�COMPUTER ����������� Display the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN terminal every time the projector is turned on�HDBaseT ���������������� Project the HDBaseT or WIRED LAN signal�SLOT ���������������������� Project the picture via the optional board (sold separately) inserted into the SLOT�

Page 150: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

133

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingClosedCaption[CLOSEDCAPTION]ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideoorS-Video.Thesubtitlesandtextwillbedisplayedashortwhileaftertheon-screenmenudisappears.

OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode�CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed�TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed�

SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]Usethisfeaturetodisplayablue/blackscreenorlogowhennosignalisavailable.Thedefaultbackgroundis[BLUE].

NOTE: • Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground

isdisplayedwithoutthelogowhenthereisnosignal.

Page 151: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

134

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[POWER OPTIONS]

SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]Settingthepowerconsumptioninthestandbymode.

NORMAL ���������������� In the standby mode, the power consumption of the projector is 0�5 W�In the standby mode, the POWER indicator lights up in red while the STATUS indicator will go off�• Whensetto[NORMAL],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillbedisabled.HDMIOUTterminals,

Ethernet/HDBaseT port, LAN function, mail notification functionNETWORK STANDBY ������������������������������ Compared to [NORMAL], the power consumption in the standby mode is higher but power can be supplied

to the projector using a wired LAN�In the standby mode, the power indicator will light up in orange while the status indicator will be turned off�

Important:• When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselected,[AUTOPOWEROFF]willturngreyincolorandbedisabledand[0:15]willbeselected

automatically.• Inthefollowingconditions,the[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojectorwillgointothesleepmode.Inthe

sleepmode,thefansintheprojectorrotateforthepurposeofinteriorpartsprotection.* Sleepmodereferstothemodewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothe[STANDBYMODE]settingareremoved.• When[ON]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[AMXBEACON]• When[ENABLE]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[CRESTRON]→[CRESTRONCONTROL].• Whenacheckmarkisplacedfor[NETWORKSERVICE]→[ExtronXTP].• When[HDBaseT]isselectedunder[CONTROL]→[REMOTESENSOR]• WhenasignalisbeingreceivedfromaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice

• When[NORMAL]isselected,the[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]displayturnsgreyincolorandisdisabled,and[OFF]isautomati-callyselected.

NOTE:• WhenconnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially,ifthetransmissiondeviceissettotransmitremotecontrol

signals,thepowerconsumptionoftheprojectorinthestandbymodewillincrease.

TIP:• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO2emissionreduction.

EnablingDirectPowerOn[DIRECTPOWERON]Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.ThiseliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.

Page 152: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

135

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]Ifsetto[NETWORKSTANDBY],theprojectorautomaticallydetectsthesynchronizingsignalinputfromthefollowingselectedterminalsandprojectsthepictureaccordingly:Computer,HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,andSLOT.

OFF ������������������������ AUTO POWER ON SELECT function will be switch off�HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT ������������������������������ When a computer signal of a selected input terminal is detected, the power supply of the projector will be

turned on automatically and the computer screen will be projected�

NOTE: • IfyouwanttoactivatetheAUTOPOWERONSELECTfunctionafterpoweringOFFtheprojector,interruptthesignalfromtheinput

terminalsordisconnectthecomputercablefromtheprojectorandwaitforatleast3secondsbeforeinputtingthesignalfromtheselectedterminal.WhentheprojectoristurnedoffandentersNETWORKSTANDBYmode,butsignalsfromthecomputercontinuetobesenttheprojector,theprojectormaintainsNETWORKSTANDBYmodeandwillnotturnONautomatically.Inaddi-tion,ifsignalsfromHDMI,DisplayPortorHDBaseTcontinuetobesenttotheprojector,dependingonthesettingsofconnectedexternaldevices,theprojectormayturnONautomaticallyevenifitispoweredoffandNETWORKSTANDBYmodeisineffect.

• ThisfunctiondoesnotworkwhencomponentsignalscomeintoCOMPUTERINterminalorwhencomputersignalsareSynconGreenorCompositeSync.

EnablingPowerManagement[AUTOPOWEROFF]Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:0:05,0:10,0:15,0:20,0:30,1:00)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

NOTE:• ThepowerwillnotgooffautomaticallywhenasignalfromtheEthernet/HDBaseTportisbeingprojected.• [AUTOPOWEROFF]appearsingreywhenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NETWORKSTANDBY]and[0:15]willbesetautomati-

cally.

UsingOffTimer[OFFTIMER]1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.

2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.

3. The remaining time starts counting down.

4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.

NOTE:• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3

MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.

SettingfortheOptionalBoard[SLOTPOWER]Whenusingtheoptionalboardinstalledintheslot,setthefollowingoptions.

PROJECTOR ON �����������������Thisfeaturewillturnonoroffthepowertotheoptionalboard.OFF: Forcibly turn off the power to the optional board installed in the slot�ON (Default): Turn on the power to the optional board installed in the slot�

PROJECTOR STANDBY �������Thisfeaturewillautomaticallyenableordisabletheoptionalboardinstalledintheslotwhentheprojectorisinstandby.

DISABLE: Select this option to disable the optional board in the projector standby�ENABLE (Default): Select this option to enable the optional board in the projector standby�

Page 153: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

136

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Returning to Factory Default [RESET]TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)exceptthefollowing:

[CURRENTSIGNAL]Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[AS-PECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].

[ALLDATA]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[ADMINISTRATORMODE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].

[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE], [EDGEBLENDING], [MULTISCREEN], [SCREENTYPE], [GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[ADMINISTRATORMODE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.

NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.

Page 154: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

137

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❽ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlightmoduleusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisasfollows:

TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.

[USAGE TIME]

[LIGHTHOURSUSED](H)[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)

• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]

Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page41)

[SOURCE(1)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

Page 155: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

138

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE(2)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

[SOURCE(3)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

[SOURCE(4)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

Page 156: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

139

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[WIRED LAN]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS

[VERSION(1)]

FIRMWARE DATASUB-CPU

[OTHERS]

DATETIME PROJECTORNAMEMODELNO. SERIALNUMBERCONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]isset)

Page 157: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

140

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[HDBaseT]

SIGNALQUALITY OPERATIONMODELINKSTATUS HDMISTATUS

Page 158: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

141

❶ Mounting a lens (sold separately)Thisprojectorcanbeusedwith8kindsofoptionallenses(soldseparately).ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP18ZL(standardzoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.Seepage182forlensoptions.Important:• Forusingthefollowingoptionlenses,besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.(→ page 18, 118) NP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL,NP31ZL

WARNING:(1)Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostop,(2)turnoffthemainpowerswitch,(3)disconnectthepowercordandwaitfortheunittocoolbeforemountingorremovingthelens.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.

NOTE:• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeing

moved,damagingthelensandthelensshiftmechanism.• Whendismountingthelensfromtheprojector,returnthelenspositiontothehomepositionbeforeturningoffthepower.Failure

todosomaypreventthelensfrombeingmountedordismountedbecauseofnarrowspacebetweentheprojectorandthelens.• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.• Performtheseoperationsonaflatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfrom

gettinginside.Ifthelensremainsdetachedfromtheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,dustmaycollectwithintheopticalunitanddamagethelens,causingdeteriorationofprojectedimage.

• Lensesotherthanspecifiedinthismanualcannotbemountedonthisprojector.

Mounting the lens1. Removethedustcapfromtheprojector.

Pushthetongueatthetopleftoutwardandpulltheknobatthecenterofthecap.

2. Removethelenscaponthebackofthelens.

• ThelensNP18ZLisusedasanexample.

NOTE: • Makesuretoremovethelenscapattheunitbackside.Ifthelens

unitwiththelenscapremainingonisinstalledontheprojector,itmaycauseofmalfunction.

3. Hold the lens unit aligning the labelled arrow on the unit coming top and insert the unit to the projector.

Insertthelensslowlyallthewayin,keepingthepositioningslitatthesameangle.

Arrowmark

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Page 159: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

142

6. Installation and Connections

4. Turn the lens unit rightward until click is heard.

Thelensisnowfastenedontotheprojector.

TIP:MountingthelenstheftpreventionscrewFastenthelenstheftpreventionscrewincludedwiththeprojectortothebottomoftheprojectorsothatthelenscannotberemovedeasily.

Removing the lens

Beforeremovingthelens:

1. Turn on the projector and display an image. (→ page 17)

2. Press and hold the SHUTTER/HOME POSITION button over 2 seconds.

Thelenspositionwillbemovedtothehomeposition.

3. Turnoffthemainpowerswitch,andthenunplugthepowercord.

4. Wait until the projector cabinet is cool enough to handle.

1. While pressing the LENS release button on the projec-tor’sfrontpanelfullyin,turnthelenscounterclockwise.

Thelenscomesoff.

NOTE:IfthelenscannotberemovedwhentheLENSreleasebuttonispressed,checkwhetherthelenstheftpreventionscrewismounted.

2. Afterslowlypullingthelensofftheprojector,releasetheLENS release button.

- Afterremovingthelens,mountthelenscaps(frontandback)includedwiththelensbeforestoringthelens.

- Ifnolensisgoingtobemountedontheprojector,mountthedustcapincludedwiththeprojector.

Page 160: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

143

6. Installation and Connections

❷ Making ConnectionsAcomputercable,BNCcable(5-coretype),HDMIcable,oraDisplayPortcablecanbeusedtoconnecttoacomputer.Theconnectioncableisnotenclosedwiththeprojector.Pleasegetreadyasuitablecablefortheconnection.

Analog RGB signal connection

• Connectthecomputercabletothedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputerandtheCOMPUTERINterminalontheprojector.Pleaseuseacomputercableattachedwithaferritecore.

• Whenconnectingthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheBNCinputterminal,useaconversioncabletoconverttheBNCcable(5core)toaminiD-sub15pincable.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC BNC COMPUTER2

COMPUTER IN

BNC IN

Computercable(soldcommercially)

RGB-to-BNCcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:Pleasechecktheoperatingmanualofthecomputerasthename,positionanddirec-tionof the terminalmaydifferdependingonthecomputer.

Page 161: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

144

6. Installation and Connections

Digital RGB signal connection

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputterminalandtheprojector’sHDMIINterminal.

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputterminalandtheprojector’sDisplayPortINterminal.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

DisplayPortIN DisplayPort DisplayPort

DisplayPort INHDMI IN

HDMIcable(notsupplied) DisplayPortcable(notsupplied)

Page 162: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

145

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenconnectinganHDMIcable• UseacertifiedHighSpeedHDMI®CableorHighSpeedHDMI®CablewithEthernet.

Cautions when connecting a DisplayPort cable• UseacertifiedDisplayPortcable.

• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.

• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.

• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sterminal,thenpullthecableout.

• PowercanbesuppliedtotheconnectingdevicefromtheDisplayPortINterminal(maximumof1.65W).However,powerwillnotbesuppliedtothecomputer.

• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.

• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,useaconverter(commerciallyavailable).

Page 163: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

146

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputterminal,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnectthecom-putertotheprojector’sHDMIINterminal(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).

HDMI IN

NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnectingdevices.• Whenavideodeckisconnectedviaascanconverter,etc.,thedisplaymaynotbecorrectduringfast-forwardingandrewinding.• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-

dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMI.Finally,turnonyourPC. Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,

restartyourPC.• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subterminalmay

resultinnopicturebeingdisplayedfromthedigitaloutputofthegraphicscard.• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojector isrunning.If thesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthen

reconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.• TheCOMPUTERINterminalssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.TheBNCinputterminaldoesnotsupportWindowsPlugandPlay.• AMacsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMaccomputer. ToconnectaMaccomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort→

DisplayPortconvertercable.

Page 164: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

147

6. Installation and Connections

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

Connecting an External Monitor

Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputeranalogimageyou’reprojecting.• BNC(CV)componentvideosignalsandBNC(Y/C)S-videosignalswillnotbeoutput.• PleaserefertoPage68whendisplayingthePIP/PBPscreen.

NOTE:• WhenoutputtingHDMIsignals,turnonthepowerofthevideodeviceontheoutputsideandkeepitconnectedbeforeinputting

videosignalsintothisdevice.TheHDMIOUTterminalsoftheprojectorareequippedwithrepeaterfunctions.WhenadeviceisconnectedtotheHDMIOUTterminal,theresolutionoftheoutputsignalislimitedbytheresolutionsupportedbytheconnecteddevice.

• InthecaseoftheHDMIOUTterminaloftheprojector,thetheoreticalnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedinaseriesisseven.Themaximumnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaybereducedbytheexternalenvironmentandqualityofthesignalandcable,etc.ThenumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaydifferdependingontheHDCPversion,restrictiononthenumberofHDCPrepeatersinthesourcedeviceandthequalityofthecable.Theoverallsystemneedstobecheckedinadvancewhenbuild-ingasystem.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NORMAL],videowillnotbeoutputiftheprojectorgoesintothestandbymode.Setthemodeto[NETWORKSTANDBY],turnonthepowerofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitinaconnectedstate.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]ofthisdeviceissetto[NORMAL],HDMIsignalswillnotbeoutput.TooutputHDMIsignals,setthe[STANDBYMODE]to[NETWORKSTANDBY],turnonthepowersupplyofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitconnected.

• HDMIrepeaterfunctionwillnotbefunctionedifswitchingterminalsandputtingin/pullingouttheHDMIcableisperformedonthe 2nd projector and after.

Computercable(VGA)(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)

Page 165: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

148

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Your Blu-ray Player or Other AV EquipmentComponentvideosignal/S-videosignalconnection

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

BNC(CV) BNC(CV) VIDEO

BNC(Y/C) BNC(Y/C) S-VIDEO

CV Y C

BNC(CV)

BNC(Y) BNC(C)

BNCcable(notsupplied)

Audioequipment

Page 166: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

149

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Component Input

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC BNC COMPUTER2

NOTE:• Whenthesignalformatissetto[AUTO](defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped),thecomputersignalandcomponentsignalare

automatically distinguished and switched. If the signals cannot bedistinguished, select [COMPONENT]under [ADJUST]→ [VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]intheon-screenmenuoftheprojector.

• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDterminal,usethesoldseparatelyDterminalconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).

COMPUTER IN

15-pin-to-RCA(female)×3cableadapter(ADP-CV1E) BNC(male)-to-RCA(male)conversion

cable×3(soldcommercially)

ComponentvideoRCA×3cable(notsupplied)

Blu-rayplayerAudioEquipment

Page 167: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

150

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting HDMI InputYoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayer,harddiskplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMIINterminalofyourprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIterminal:Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.Thiswillprovideimprovedimagecontrastandmoredetaileddarkareas.Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.

• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINterminaloftheprojectortotheBlu-rayplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeBlu-rayplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[ADJUST]→[VIDEO]→ [VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.

HDMI IN

Audiocable(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)UseHighSpeedHDMI®Cable.

Page 168: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

151

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting a document cameraYoucanconnectadocumentcameraandprojectprinteddocuments,etc.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC(CV) BNC(CV) VIDEO

BNC (CV)

COMPUTER IN

VIDEO

NOTE:• Name,position, anddirectionof ter-

minalsarevarydependingoncameramodel.Pleasecheckuser’smanualofyourcamerafordetails.

BNC(male)andRCA(male)conver-sioncable(notsupplied)

Computercable(notsupplied)

Page 169: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

152

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting to a Wired LANTheprojectorcomesstandardwithaEthernet/HDBaseTport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page127).

Example of LAN connectionExampleofwiredLANconnection

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Server

Hub

LANcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.

Page 170: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

153

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (sold commercially)HDBaseTisaconnectionstandardforhomeappliancesthatisestablishedbytheHDBaseTAlliance.UseaLANcablesoldcommerciallytoconnecttheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojector(RJ-45)toaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially.TheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojectorsupportsHDMIsignals(HDCP)fromtransmissiondevices,controlsignalsfromexternaldevices(serial,LAN)andremotecontrolsignals(IRcommands).

Connection example

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Computer(forcontroluse)Computer(foroutputuse)

Exampleofatransmissiondevice

Remotecontrol

HDMIoutputvideodevice

NOTE:• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).• ThemaximumtransmissiondistanceovertheLANcableis100m.(themaximumdistanceis70mfora4Ksignal)• Pleasedonotuseothertransmissionequipmentbetweentheprojectorandtransmissionequipment.Thepicturequalitymaybe

deteriorated as a result.• ThisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkwithallHDBaseTtransmissiondevicessoldcommercially.

Page 171: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

154

6. Installation and Connections

Portrait projection (vertical orientation)Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledverticallytodisplaycomputerimagesinportraitorientation.

Precautions during installation• Pleasedonotinstalltheprojectorinaverticalorientationontopofthefloorortableonitsown.Ifnot,thepro-jectormayfallover,resultingininjury,damageormalfunction.

• Astandforsupportingtheprojectorneedstobemadeforthispurposetokeepintakeairflowsecurelyandpreventivemeasureoffallingover.Thestandmustbedesignedsuchthatthecenterofgravityoftheprojectorislocatedwellwithinthelegsofthestand.Ifnot,theprojectormayfalloverandresultininjury,damageandmalfunction.

• Iftheprojectorisinstalledonwhichtheintakeventfacingdown,opticalpartlifemaybeshorten.

Page 172: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

155

6. Installation and Connections

Design and manufacturing conditions for the standPleasehireaninstallationserviceprovider(forafee)forthedesignandmanufactureofacustomizedstandtobeusedforportraitprojection.Pleaseensurethatthedesigncomplieswiththefollowingconditions:

• Thereare3ventilationholesatthebottomoftheprojector.Theseholesshouldremainunobstructed.

• Usethe6screwholesatthebackoftheprojectortosecureittothestand.

Screwholecenterdimension:300×300(pitch=150)mm

Screwholedimensionontheprojector:M4withthemaximumdepth16mm

4ofthelegscanbeunscrewedforremoval.

• Horizontaladjustmentmechanism(forexample,boltsandnutsin4places)

• Pleasedesignthestandsothatitdoesnoteasilytoppleover.

Reference drawings* Thedrawingshowingthedimensionalrequirementsisnotanactualstanddesigndrawing.

300

150 150124.5

[Side View][Front View]

(Unit: mm)

Horizontal adjuster

Air exhaust

6 - M4 bolt

Air intakeAir intake

Air intake

Page 173: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

156

6. Installation and Connections

Stacking projectorsTheprojectedimagebrightnesscanbedoubledbygravitystackinguptotwoprojectorswithoutexternalsupport.Thisiscalled“StackingProjection”.2projectorscanbestackedontopofeachotherfor“Stacking”setup.

CAUTION:Aminimumoftwopersonsarerequiredtocarrytheprojector.Otherwisetheprojectormaytumbleordrop,causingpersonalinjury.

NOTE:• Projectorswithdifferentmodelnumberscannotbegravitystacked. Optionallenseswiththesamemodelnumbersmustbeusedforstackingprojection.• Forstackingprojectors,attachthesuppliedfourstackingholderstothetopofthelowerprojector.(→ nextpage)• Itdoesnotsupportoverlayaccuracybystackedprojectors.Preciseimagesassmalltextsanddetailedgraphicscannotbeclearly

read or seen.• Useacommerciallyavailabledistributionamplifiertoboththeprimary(upper)andthesecondary(lower)projectorstodistribute

signal to two outputs of the two projectors.• Notesforstacking

- Askyourservicepersonforsettingupandadjustingprojectors.- Setuptheprojectorsinaplaceorstructureinawaywithsufficientstrengthtosupportthecombinedweightofthetwoprojec-

tors.Thesingleprojectorwithalensweighsuptoapproximately31kg/68lbs.- Topreventtheprojectorsfromfalling,fastentheminawaytowithstandearthquakes.- Doublestackingwillcauseroomtemperaturetoincrease.Ventilatetheroomwell.- Donotattempttostackprojectorsontheceiling.Gravitystackingcannotbedoneontheceiling.- Warmuptheprojectorsforonehourbeforethedesiredprojectionisobtained.- Makesurethatthepositionoftheupperprojectordoesnotexceeditsspecifications.Whensettingupthetwoprojectors,

adjustable height range for the tilt foot on the upper projector is added to the total adjustable range.- Setuptheprojectorssothattheprojectedimageshowsaslittlegeometricdistortionsaspossible.Thelensisdifferentin

geometricdistortionbetweenwide(+)andtele(−)forzoom.- Adjustthehorizontallensshifttothelenscenter.

s

Page 174: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

157

6. Installation and Connections

AttachingStackingHoldersAttachthreestackingholderstothreelocationsonthetopofthelowerprojector.

Preparation:ToolsrequiredarePhillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)andfourstackingholderspackagedwiththeprojector.Loosenthetiltfoot(fourlocations)oftheprojector.

1. Removerubbercapsandscrewsatfourlocations.

(1)Useyourtweezersornailtopinchandpulluptherubbercap.

(2)Removethescrewfromasquarehole.(1) (2)

2. Attachthethreestackingholdersatfourlocations.

(1)Placeastackingholderinasquarehole.

(2)UsethescrewremovedatStep1tofixthestackingholderinthesquarehole.

(3)PuttherubbercapremovedatStep1backintothesquarehole.

• Snapthetabsonbothoftherubbercapintotheslitsonbothsidesinthesquarehole.(1) (2) (3)

Page 175: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

158

6. Installation and Connections

3. Putanotherprojectoronthefirstprojector.

Puteachtiltfootoftheupperprojectoronthestackingholders(fourlocations).

• Eachtiltfoothasarubber.Placeeachtiltfootrubberonstackingholders(fourlocations).

Footrubber

TIP:• Toremovethestackingholders,performtheabovestepsinreverseorder.

Page 176: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

159

7. Maintenance❶ Cleaning the Lens• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.

• Useablowerorlenspapertocleanthelens,andbecarefulnottoscratchormarthelens.

WARNING• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedtothelens,etc.Doingsomayresultinfires.

• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.

❷ Cleaning the CabinetTurnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.

Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.

• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.

• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuumcleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.

Vacuumthedustofftheventilationslits.

• Poorventilationcausedbydustaccumulationinventilationopenings(alsoatthebottomoftheprojector)canresultinoverheatingandmalfunction.Theseareasshouldbecleanedregularly.

• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourfingersoranyhardobjects

• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.

NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproductinprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacefinishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.

Page 177: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

160

8. User Supportware❶ Operating Environment for Software Included on CD-ROMNames and Features of Bundled Software Programs

Nameofsoftwareprogram Features

VirtualRemoteTool(Windowsonly)

Whenthecomputerandprojectorareconnectedusinganetwork(wiredLAN),suchoperationsasturningtheprojector’spoweronandoffandswitchingthesignalcanbeperformed.Itisalsopossibletosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthebackgroundlogo.Oncetheimageisregistered,itcanbelockedtopreventthelogofrombeingoverwritten.

PCControlUtilityPro4PCControlUtilityPro5(forMacOS)

This isasoftwareprogramusedtooperatetheprojector fromthecomputerwhenthecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN.(→page152)• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.

NOTE:• ToconnecttheprojectortothenetworkbyusingtheVirtualRemoteTool,PCControlUtilityPro4,PCControlUtilityPro5,please

configurethesettingsof[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]intheon-screenmenu(→ page 127).

Download serviceFortheupdateinformationaboutthesesoftwareprogramsandtheiroperatingenvironment,visitourwebsite:URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

Page 178: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

161

8. User Supportware

❷ Installing Software Program

Installation for Windows software

ThesoftwareprogramsexceptPCControlUtilityPro5supportWindows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVista,andWindowsXP.

NOTE:• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8.1,

Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindows8.1,Windows8,WindowsXPHomeEdition,andWindows

XPProfessional,“Microsoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0,3.0or3.5isavailablefromMicrosoft’swebpage.Downloadandinstallitonyourcomputer.

1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.

Themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

TIP:Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.ForWindows71. Click“start”onWindows.

2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.

3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\LAUNCHER.EXE)

4. Click“OK”.

Themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

Page 179: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

162

8. User Supportware

2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.

Theinstallationwillstart.

• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:

Uninstalling a Software ProgramPreparation:Exit thesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstall thesoftwareprogram, theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministra-tor”privilege(WindowsXP).

•ForWindows8.1/Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

TheControlPanelwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”

The“ProgramsandFeatures”windowwillbedisplayed.

3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.

4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.

•Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.

Followtheinstructionsonthescreenstocompletetheuninstallation.

•ForWindowsXP1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

TheControlPanelwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.

TheAdd/RemoveProgramswindowwillbedisplayed.

3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.

Followtheinstructionsonthescreenstocompletetheuninstallation.

Page 180: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

163

8. User Supportware

Using on Mac OS

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer.

1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.

TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.

2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.

TheCD-ROMwindowwillbedisplayed.

3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.

4. Double-click“PCControlUtilityPro5.pkg”.

Theinstallerwillstart.

5. Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.

Theconfirmationwindowwillbedisplayed

7. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.

Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:

•Uninstallingasoftwareprogram1. Putthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”foldertotheTrashicon.

2. PuttheconfigurationfileofPCControlUtilityPro5totheTrashicon.

• TheconfigurationfileofPCControlUtilityPro5islocatedin“/Users/<yourusername>/ApplicationData/NECProjectorUserSupportware/PCControlUtilityPro5”.

Page 181: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

164

8. User Supportware

❸ Operating the Projector Via the LAN (Virtual Remote Tool)Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontroloperationonyourPC.

VirtualRemotescreen

RemoteControlWindow Toolbar

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page166)

NOTE:• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions: (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)

* Filesize:Within256kilobytes* Imagesize:Withintheresolutionoftheprojector* Fileformat:PNG(Fullcolor)

• Logodata(image)sentusingtheVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedinthecenterwiththesurroundingareainblack.• Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregisteritasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagefile

(\Logo\NEC_logo2015_1920x1200.png)includedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

Page 182: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

165

8. User Supportware

Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page152)and“10.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser”(→page52)

Start Virtual Remote Tool

Start using the shortcut icon• Double-clicktheshortcuticon on the Windows Desktop.

Start from the Start menu• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]

→[VirtualRemoteTool].

WhenVirtualRemoteToolstartsforthefirsttime,“EasySetup”windowwillbedisplayed.

The“EasySetup”featureisnotavailableonthismodel.Click“CloseEasySetup”.

Closingthe“EasySetup”windowwilldisplaythe“ProjectorList”window.

Selectyourprojectoryouwishtoconnect.ThiswilldisplaytheVirtualRemotescreen.

NOTE:• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonvianetworkconnection.

TIP:• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window. Todoso,clicktoplaceacheckmarkfor“ DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreen.

Page 183: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

166

8. User Supportware

ExitingVirtualRemoteTool1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon on the Taskbar.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“Exit”.

TheVirtualRemoteToolwillbeclosed.

ViewingthehelpfileofVirtualRemoteTool•Displayingthehelpfileusingthetaskbar1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Click“Help”.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

•DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.and

then“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 184: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

167

8. User Supportware

❹ Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4/Pro 5)Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”or“PCControlUtilityPro5”includedonthecompanionNECPro-jectorCD-ROM,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.PCControlUtilityPro4isaprogramcompatiblewithWindows.(→thispage)PCControlUtilityPro5isaprogramcompatiblewithMacOS.(→page170)

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picture freeze,picturemute,audiomute,adjusting,errormessagenotification,eventschedule.

ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.ForinformationonhowtousePCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.(→page169,170)

Step1:InstallPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5onthecomputer.Step2:ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN.Step3:StartPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.

TIP:• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.

Using on Windows

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 4 on the computer

NOTE:• Toinstalloruninstalltheprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave[Administrator]privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,

Windows7,WindowsVistaandWindowsXP)• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.

1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.

Themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

Page 185: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

168

8. User Supportware

TIP:Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.ForWindows7:1. Click“start”onWindows.

2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.

3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\LAUNCHER.EXE)

4. Click“OK”.

themenuwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“PCControlUtilityPro4”onthemenuwindow.

Theinstallationwillstart.

Whentheinstallationiscomplete,theWelcomewindowwillbedisplayed.

3 Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”carefully.

4 Ifyouagree,click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”andthenclick“Next”.

• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

• Whentheinstallationiscomplete,youwillreturntothemenuwindow.

TIP:•UninstallingPCControlUtilityPro4TouninstallPCControlUtilityPro4,dothesameproceduresstatedasin“UninstallingaSoftwareProgram”.(→ page 162, 163)

Page 186: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

169

8. User Supportware

Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page152)and“10.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser”(→page52)

Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 4Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→ “PCControlUtilityPro4”.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/

sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.

[Example]ForWindows7:Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputertosleep”→“Never”.NOTE: • When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN)

connection.

TIP:

ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4• DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.

Click“Help(H)”→“Help(H)…”ofwindowofPCControlUtilityPro4inthisorder.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

• DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.

Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→ “PCControlUtilityPro4Help”.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 187: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

170

8. User Supportware

Using on Mac OS

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.

TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.

2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.

TheCD-ROMwindowwillbedisplayed.

3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.

4. Double-click“PCControlUtilityPro5.pkg”.

Theinstallerwillstart.

5. Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.

Theconfirmationwindowwillbedisplayed

7. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.

Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

Step 2: Connect the projector to a LANConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page152)and“10.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser”(→page52)

Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 51. OpenyourApplicationsfolderinMacOS.

2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.

3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”icon.

PCControlUtilityPro5willstart.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro5towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinsleepmode.

Select“EnergySaver”fromthe“SystemPreferences”inMacanddisableitssleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN)

connection. TIP:

ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro5•DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro5whileitisrunning.• Fromthemenubar,click“Help”→“Help”inthisorder.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

•DisplayingtheHelpusingtheDock1. Open“ApplicationFolder”inMacOS.

2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.

3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5Help”icon.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 188: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

171

9. Appendix

❶ Throw distance and screen sizeThisprojectorcanbeusedwith8kindsofoptionallenses(soldseparately).Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealenssuitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,seepage141.

Lens types and throw distance

Applicablelensunit:NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL/NP31ZL

Screensize Lensunitmodelnameinch NP16FL NP31ZL NP17ZL NP18ZL NP19ZL NP20ZL NP21ZL40 0.6- 0.8 50 0.8 0.8 - 1.0 1.3 - 1.9 1.8 - 2.4 2.4- 4.0 3.8 - 5.8 5.6- 8.960 1.0 1.0 - 1.2 1.6- 2.3 2.2- 2.9 2.8- 4.8 4.6- 7.0 6.8- 10.780 1.3 1.3 - 1.6 2.2- 3.1 3.0 - 3.9 3.8 - 6.4 6.2- 9.3 9.1- 14.4

100 1.7 1.6- 2.0 2.7- 3.9 3.7- 4.9 4.8- 8.0 7.7- 11.7 11.5 - 18.1 120 2.0 2.0- 2.5 3.3 - 4.7 4.5- 5.9 5.8 - 9.6 9.3- 14.1 13.8 - 21.7150 2.5 2.5- 3.1 4.1- 5.8 5.6- 7.4 7.2- 12.0 11.7- 17.6 17.4- 27.3200 3.4 3.3 - 4.1 5.5 - 7.8 7.5- 9.9 9.7- 16.1 15.6- 23.5 23.3- 36.4240 4.1 4.0- 5.0 6.6- 9.4 9.1- 11.9 11.6- 19.3 18.8 - 28.3 28.0- 43.8300 5.1 5.0 - 6.2 8.2- 11.7 11.3 - 14.9 14.5- 24.1 23.5- 35.4 35.0 - 54.8350 5.8 - 7.3400 6.6- 8.3 450 7.5- 9.4500 8.3 - 10.4

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP16FLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8:0.8m(min.)to5.1m(max.)NP17ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.3toH×1.8:1.3m(min.)to11.7m(max.)NP18ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.7toH×2.3:1.8m(min.)to14.9m(max.)NP19ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×2.2toH×3.7:2.4m(min.)to24.1m(max.)NP20ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×3.6toH×5.4:3.8m(min.)to35.4m(max.)NP21ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×5.3toH×8.3:5.6m(min.)to54.8m(max.)NP31ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8toH×0.9:0.6m(min.)to10.4m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP18ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 173),H(screenwidth)=127.2"/323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis323.1cm×1.7to323.1cm×2.3=549.3cmto743.13cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

Page 189: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

172

9. Appendix

Projection range for the different lenses

50-300"40-500"

50-300"

50-300" 50-300" 50-300"

0.8–5.1 mNP16FL :

NP17ZL: 1.3–11.7 m

NP31ZL: 0.6–10.4 m

NP18ZL: 1.8–14.9 m

NP19ZL: 2.4–24.1 m

NP20ZL: 3.8–35.4 m

NP21ZL: 5.6–54.8 m

50-300"

Applicablelensunit:NP39ML

Screensize(inch)

ThrowdistanceL1(m)

L2(m) H1(m) H2(m)

100 0.82 -0.024 2.05 0.71120 0.97 0.13 2.43 0.81150 1.20 0.35 3.00 0.98200 1.57 0.73 3.95 1.26250 1.95 1.11 4.90 1.54300 2.33 1.49 5.85 1.81350 2.71 1.87 6.81 2.09

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP39MLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.38:0.8m(min.)to2.7m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.* Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethe

calculationisapproximate.

L1

H1

H2

L2

Screen face

Screen center

Projector rear face

Center of the lens unit projection window

Projector bottom face(In the condition the tilt foot is not

lengthen)

[Throw distance]

Screen bottom end

Screen top end

Page 190: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

173

9. Appendix

Tables of screen sizes and dimensions

Screenheight

Screenwidth

16:10screensize (diagonal)

Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight

(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

40 33.9 86.2 21.2 53.860 50.9 129.2 31.8 80.880 67.8 172.3 42.4 107.7

100 84.8 215.4 53.0 134.6120 101.8 258.5 63.6 161.5150 127.2 323.1 79.5 201.9200 169.6 430.8 106.0 269.2240 203.5 516.9 127.2 323.1300 254.4 646.2 159.0 403.9400 339.2 861.6 212.0 538.5500 424.0 1077.0 265.0 673.1

Page 191: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

174

9. Appendix

Lens shifting rangeThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebyusingtheLENSSHIFTbuttons(→page23).Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.

NOTE: • Pleasedonotusethelensshiftfunctionwhenprojectingportraitimages.Pleaseuseitwiththelensinthecenterwhenoneamong

thelensunits,NP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZLorNP31ZLisfixedon.ForusingthelensunitNP39ML,select[TYPE]for[LENSPOSITION]in[INSTALLATION(2)]in[SETUP]ontheonsceenmenuformovingthelensattheappropriateposition.

Legend:V“Vertical”referstothescreenheightandH“Horizontal”referstothescreenwidth.Thelensshiftrangeisexpressedasaratioofheightandwidth,respectively.

100%V

50%V

30%V

100%H

20%H

10%H

10%H

20%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

* Thelensshiftrangeisthesameforceilinginstallation.

(Example)Whenusingtoprojectona150"screenAccordingtothe“Tableofscreensizesanddimensions”(→page173),H=127.2"/323.1cm,V=79.5"/201.9cm.Adjustment range in the vertical direction: the projected image canbemovedupwards 0.5× 79.5"/201.9 cm≈ 39.8"/101cm,downwardsapproximately39.8"/101cm(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.15×127.2"/323.1cm≈19.1"/48cm,totherightapproximately19.1"/48cm.* Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.

Page 192: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

175

9. Appendix

❷ Mounting the Optional Board (sold separately)CAUTIONBeforemountingorremovingtheoptionalboard,besuretoturnofftheprojector,waitforthefanstostopandturnoffthemainpowerswitch.

Toolneeded:Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)

1. Turnoffthemainpowerswitchoftheprojector.

2. LoosenthetwoscrewsontheSLOTcoveroftheterminals.

RemovethetwoscrewsandtheSLOTcover.

NOTE: • Keepthetwoscrewsandtheslotcover.

3. Insert the optional board into the slot.

Makesurethattheboardisinsertedintotheslotinthecorrectorientation.

Incorrect orientation may cause miscommunicationbetweentheoptionalboardandprojector.

Page 193: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

176

9. Appendix

4. Tightenthetwoscrewsonbothsidesoftheslot.

• Besuretotightenthescrews.

Thiswillcompleteinstallationoftheoptionalboard.

Toselecttheoptionalboardsource,selectSLOTastheinput.

NOTE:• Mountingtheoptionalboardmaycausethefanstoruninthestandbymodeforthepurposeofcoolingdependingontheoptional

board.Thefanspeedmayalsoincreaseinordertocooltheprojectorproperly.Bothoftheseinstancesareconsiderednormalandnotamalfunctionoftheprojector.

Page 194: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

177

9. Appendix

❸ Compatible Input Signal ListAnalog Computer Signal

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacXGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 60/70/75/85

WXGA

1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601360 × 768 *1 16 : 9 601366 × 768 *1 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/75/85SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *2 4 : 3 60/65/70/75WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *2 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *2 16 : 9 60MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75MAC19" 1024 × 768 4 : 3 75MAC21" 1152 × 870 *3 4 : 3 75MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65

ComponentSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

CompositeVideo/S-VideoSignal AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

NTSC 4 : 3 60PAL 4 : 3 50PAL60 4 : 3 60SECAM 4 : 3 50

Page 195: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

178

9. Appendix

HDMISignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *1 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *2 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *2 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *2 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

HDMI3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p23.98/24

16 : 9

FramePackingTopandBottom

50 SideBySide59.94/60 SideBySide

1920 × 1080i50 SideBySide

59.94/60 SideBySide

1280 × 720p

50FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

Page 196: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

179

9. Appendix

DisplayPortSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *1 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *2 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *2 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *2 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

DisplayPort 3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p

23.98/24

16 : 9

SideBySideTopandBottom

25SideBySideTopandBottom

50SideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60SideBySideTopandBottom

1920 × 1080i50

TopandBottomSideBySide

59.94/60TopandBottomSideBySide

1280 × 720p

50SideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

*1 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].*2 Nativeresolution*3 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[4:3]for[ASPECTRATIO].

• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequireddependingonthetypeofcomputer.

Page 197: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

180

9. Appendix

❹ SpecificationsModelname PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BKMethod SingleDLP®chipSpecificationsofmainparts

DMDpanel Size 0.67"(aspectratio:16:10)Pixels(*1) 2,304,000(1920dots×1200lines)

Projectionlenses Pleaserefertothespecificationsofoptionlens(→page182)Lightsource LaserDiodeOpticaldevice Opticalisolationbydichroicmirror,combiningbydichroicprism

Lightoutput(*2) (*3) 8,000lmContrastratio(*2)(allwhite/allblack) 10,000:1withdynamiccontrastScreensize(throwdistance) Pleaserefertothespecificationsofoptionlens(→page182)Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)Scanningfrequency Horizontal Analog:15kHz,24to100kHz(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingto

VESAstandardsDigital:15kHz,24to153kHz,conformingtoVESAstandards

Vertical Analog:48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandardsDigital:24,25,30,48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards

Mainadjustmentfunctions Powerzoom,powerfocus,powerlensshift,inputsignalswitching(HDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/BNC(Y/C)/COMPUTER/HDBaseT/SLOT),autoimageadjustment,pic-turemaginification,muting(video),poweron/standby,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.

Max.displayresolution(horizontal×vertical)

Analog:1920×1200(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)Digital:4096×2160(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)

InputsignalsR,G,B,H,V RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩH/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLCompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLSynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Compositevideo 1.0Vp-p/75ΩS-Video Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω

C:286Vp-p/75ΩComponent Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩDTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz)

576i,576p,720p,1080i,1080p(50Hz)DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)

Input/outputterminalsComputer/Com-ponent

Videoinput MiniD-Sub15-pin×1,BNCterminal×5

HDMI Videoinput HDMI®TerminaltypeA×1DeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatibleColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleLipSynccompatible,HDCPcompatible(*4),Supports4Kand3D

Videooutput RepeaterAudioinput HDMI:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

HDBaseT Videoinput DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bitsColorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444andYCbCr422SupportLipSync,HDCP(*4),4K,3D

Audioinput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHzSamplingbit:16/20/24bit

DisplayPort Videoinput DisplayPort×1Datarate:2.7Gbps/1.62GbpsNo.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanesColordepth:6-bit,8-bit,10-bitColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleHDCPcompatible(*4)

Audioinput DisplayPort:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bitsBNC(CV) Videoinput BNC×1BNC(Y/C) Videoinput BNC×2PCcontrolterminal D-Sub9-pin×1USBport USBtypeA×1,USBtypeB×1(Forserviceonly)Ethernet/HDBaseTport RJ-45×1,SupportsBASE-TXRemoteterminal Stereominijack×13DSYNCoutputterminal 5V/10mA,synchronizedsignaloutputfor3Duse

Page 198: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

181

9. Appendix

Modelname PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BKUsageenvironment(*5) Operatingtemperature:41to104°F(5to40°C)

Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Storagetemperature:14to140°F(-10to60°C)Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Operatingaltitude:0to3000m/10,000feet

Powersupply 100-240VAC,50/60HzPowercon-sumption

LIGHTMODE

NORMAL 874W(100-130V)/850W(200-240V)ECO1 695W(100-130V)/680W(200-240V)ECO2 456W(100-130V)/446W(200-240V)

STAND-BYMODE

NORMAL 0.18W(100-130V)/0.27W(200-240V)NETWORKSTANDBY

4.3W(100-130V)/4.4W(200-240V)

Ratedinputcurrent 9.6A-4.0AExternaldimensions 19.7"(width)×8.3"(height)×22.7"(depth)/500(width)×211(height)×577(depth)

mm(notincludingprotrudingparts)19.7"(width)×8.5"(height)×23.0"(depth)/500(width)×216(height)×583(depth)mm(includingprotrudingparts)

Weight 61.7lbs/28kg(notincludinglens)

*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.*2 Thisisthelightoutputvaluethatresultsfromsettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[NORMAL]andsettingthe[PRESET]to[HIGH-BRIGHT]whileusingtheNP18ZLlens(soldseparately).

Thelightoutputvalueislowerwhensettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[ECO1]or[ECO2].([ECO1]:about80%,[ECO2]:about50%).Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.

*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2012*4 HDMI®(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology? HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP)isasystemforpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterface(HDMI).

IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.WiththeimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).

Video:DeepColor;8/10/12-bit,LipSync Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit*5 Dependingonthealtitudeandtemperature,theprojectorgoesinto“ForcedECOMODE”.• Thesespecificationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

Foradditionalinformationvisit:US:http://www.necdisplay.com/Europe:http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.htmlForinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.

Page 199: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

182

9. Appendix

Optionlens(soldseparately)

NP16FL Powerfocusthrowratio0.76:1,F1.85,f=11.6mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):0.81–5.08m

NP17ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio1.25–1.79:1,F1.85–2.5,f=18.7–26.5mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):1.33–11.74m

NP18ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio1.73–2.27:1,F1.64–1.86,f=25.7–33.7mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):1.83–14.88m

NP19ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio2.22–3.67:1,F1.86–2.48,f=32.91–54.23mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):2.36–24.13m

NP20ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio3.6–5.4:1,F1.85–2.41,f=52.8–79.1mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):3.80–35.36m

NP21ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio5.3–8.3:1,F1.85–2.48,f=78.5–121.9mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):5.60–54.81m

NP31ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio0.75–0.93:1,F1.96–2.3,f=11.3–14.1mmImageSize(Diagonal):40–500inches/1.02–12.7mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):0.62–10.41m

NP39ML PowerfocusThrowratio0.38:1,F2.0,f=5.64mmImagesize(Diagonal):100–350inches/2.54–8.89mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):0.82–2.7m

Page 200: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

183

9. Appendix

Power CordIfthesuppliedpowercordcannotbeusedorinyourareathevoltageconditionisdifferentfromthesuppliedpowercord,usepowercordsthataresuitablefortheelectricalspecifications,typesofpowercordsandregulationsofthecountryofinstallation,asshowninthefollowingtableasshownbelow.Formoreinformation,contactyourdealer.Power Cord Electrical Specifications

Powersupply PowercordelectricalspecsAC100-130V 125V15Aorhigher

250V16AorhigherAC200-240V 250V16Aorhigher

Type of power cord

plug

connector

cord

Plug and cordYourplugmustcomplywithyourcountry’ssafetyrequirementsandyouroutlettype.ConnectorDimensionsoftheconnectorofthepowercordareshownbelow

7+0.5−0

13±0.2

20min2.5+0.5−08±0.2

2.5+0.5−0 R3.5min

6.0+0.5−0

28+0−0.9 20+0−0.7

Unit:mm

Page 201: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

184

9. Appendix

❺ Cabinet Dimensions

Unit:mm(inch)

500 (19.7)

300 (11.8)

150 (5.9)

583

(23)

577

(22.

7)

112.

5 (4

.4)

216

(8.5

)

211

(8.3

)12

4.5

(4.9

)15

0 (5

.9)

150

(5.9

)

Lenscenter

6-M4×L16(Max)forCeilingMount*

* The screws specifications forCeilingMount:

Screwtype:M4 Screw hole dimension on theprojector:M4withthemaximumdepth16mm(0.63")

CAUTION:Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Page 202: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

185

9. Appendix

❻ Pin assignments and signal names of main terminalsCOMPUTER IN/ Component Input Terminal (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)

Connection and signal level of each pin

51 42 310

11 12 13 14 156 97 8

Signal LevelVideosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)Syncsignal:TTLlevel

Pin No. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCrSignal1 Red Cr2 GreenorSynconGreen Y3 Blue Cb4 Ground5 Ground6 RedGround CrGround7 GreenGround YGround8 BlueGround CbGround9 NoConnection10 SyncSignalGround11 NoConnection12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync14 VerticalSync15 DataClock

HDMI IN Terminal (Type A)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 TMDSData2+ 11 TMDSClockShield2 TMDSData2Shield 12 TMDSClock−3 TMDSData2− 13 CEC4 TMDSData1+ 14 Disconnection5 TMDSData1Shield 15 SCL6 TMDSData1− 16 SDA7 TMDSData0+ 17 DDC/CECgrounding8 TMDSData0Shield 18 +5Vpowersupply9 TMDSData0− 19 Hotplugdetection10 TMDSClock+

DisplayPort IN Terminal

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 Mainlinklane3− 11 Grounding02 Grounding3 12 Mainlinklane0+3 Mainlinklane3+ 13 Configuration14 Mainlinklane2− 14 Configuration25 Grounding2 15 Supplementarychannel+6 Mainlinklane2+ 16 Grounding47 Mainlinklane1− 17 Supplementarychannel−8 Grounding1 18 Hotplugdetection9 Mainlinklane1+ 19 Return

10 Mainlinklane0− 20 +3.3Vpowersupply

Page 203: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

186

9. Appendix

Ethernet/HDBaseT Port (RJ-45)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pin No. Signal1 TxD+/HDBT0+2 TxD−/HDBT0−3 RxD+/HDBT1+4 Disconnection/HDBT2+5 Disconnection/HDBT2−6 RxD−/HDBT1−7 Disconnection/HDBT3+8 Disconnection/HDBT3−

USB Port (Type A)

1

3

2

4

Pin No. Signal1 VBUS2 D−3 D+4 Grounding

PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin)

12345

6789

Communications protocol

Pin No. Signal1 Unused2 RxD receptiondata3 TxD transmissiondata4 Unused5 Grounding6 Unused7 RTS transmissionrequest8 CTS transmissionallowed9 Unused

Page 204: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

187

9. Appendix

❼ TroubleshootingThissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.

Indicator Messages

POWER Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Powerisoff. –

Flashing Blue(shortflashes) Preparingtoturnpoweron Waitawhile.

Blue(longflashes) Offtimer(enabled)Programtimer(offtimeenabled)

Orange(shortflashes) Projectorcooling Waitawhile.

Orange(longflashes) Programtimer(ontimeenabled) –

Lit Blue Poweron –

Red Standbymode(NORMAL) –

Orange Standbymode(NETWORKSTANDBY) –

STATUS Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Noproblem,orSTAND-BYMODE-“NETWORKSTANDBY”

Flashing Red(oncepercycle)

Lensisnotfixedon. Checkfixingconditionsofthelens.

Red(fourtimespercycle)

Fanproblem The cooling fan has stopped turning.Contact anNECprojectorcustomersupportcenterforrepairs.

Orange Networkconflict It is not possible to connect theprojector’s built-in LANandwireless LANsimultaneously to the samenetwork.Toconnecttheprojector’sbuilt-inLANandwirelessLANsimultaneously,connectthemtodifferentnetworks.

Lit Green STANDBYMODEinsleepmode*

Orange Buttonhasbeenpressedwhileprojectorisinkeylockmode

Theprojector’skeysarelocked.Thesettingmustbecan-celedtooperatetheprojector.(→Page124)

Projector’sIDnumberandremotecontrol’sIDnumberdonotmatch

CheckthecontrolIDs.(→Pages125)

* Sleepmodereferstothestatewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothestandbymodesettingareremoved.

Page 205: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

188

9. Appendix

LIGHT Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Thelightmoduleisturnedoff.

Flashing Red(sixtimespercycle)

Thelightsourceisnotturnedon.

Waitforover1minuteandtrytopowerONtheprojectoragain.Iftheproblemstillpersists,contacttheNECprojectorcustomersupportcenter.

Lit Green Lightmodulelit –

TEMP.Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Noproblem

Flashing Red(cyclesof2)

Temperatureproblem Thetemperatureprotectorhasbeenactivated.Iftheroomtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoacoolplace.Iftheproblemstillpersists,contacttheNECprojectorcus-tomersupportcenter.

Lit Orange Highsurroundingtem-perature(ForcedECOMode)

The surrounding temperature is high. Lower the roomtemperature.

If the temperature protector is activatedIftheprojector’sinternaltemperaturerisesabnormally,thelightmoduleturnsoffandthetemperatureindicatorflashes(repeatedlytwoflashespercycle).Itmayhappenthattheprojector’stemperatureprotectorissimultaneouslyactivatedandtheprojector’spowerturnsoff.Ifthishappens,dothefollowing:- Unplugthepowercordfromthepoweroutlet.

- Ifusinginaplacewherethesurroundingtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoadifferent,coolplace.

- Ifthereisdustintheventilationslits,clean.(→page159)

- Waitassuchabout1hourfortheprojector’sinternaltemperaturetolower.

Page 206: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

189

9. Appendix

Common Problems & Solutions(→“POWER/STATUS/LIGHT/TEMP.Indicator”onpage186,187.)

Problem CheckTheseItems

Does not turn onor shut down

• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol is on� (→ pages 14, 15)

• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufficientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�

• Thelightmodulemayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.• Incaseit’shardtothinkthetroubleisnotcausedontheabovementionedconditions,unplugthepower

cord from the outlet� Then wait 5 minutes before plugging it in again� (→ page 34)

Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 120, 135)

No picture • Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the SOURCE button or one of the source buttons again�

• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 93)• CheckthattheSHUTTER(lensshutter)orAVMUTE(imageoff)buttonsarenotpressed.• Checkthe[POWERONSHUTTER]intheonscreenmenuisnotsetto[CLOSE].• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 136)• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 45)• IftheHDMIINortheDisplayPortINsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.

- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver� For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or

graphics card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer� Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility� We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�

• SignalsmaynotbesupporteddependingontheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.IRandRS232Ccannotbeused in certain cases as well�

• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon the power to the notebook PC�

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up�* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-

saver or power management software�• Seealsothepage190�

Picture suddenly becomes dark

• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.

Color tone or hue is unusual

• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 115)

• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 93)

Image isn’t square to the screen

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 22)• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 42)

Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 26)• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 22)• Ensure that thedistancebetween theprojectorandscreen iswithin theadjustment rangeof the lens.

(→ page 171)• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 174)• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturned

on� Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�

Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both

• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported by the projector� (→ page 177)

• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 94)

Remote control does not work

• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 11)• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 12)

Indicator is lit or blinking

• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LIGHT/TEMP.Indicator.(→ page 186, 187)

Page 207: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

190

9. Appendix

Problem CheckTheseItems

Cross color in RGB mode

• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 33)• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page

94)

Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.

Page 208: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

191

9. Appendix

If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.

• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.

BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.

InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.

NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→ page 137orgotonextstep)

• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.

DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeonoroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethroughexternaldisplayselections.

• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer

IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.EachnotebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.

• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac

WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.

ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchonaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchtothe13"fixedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthenrestarttheMacagain.

NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pinterminal.

• MirroringonaMacBook

* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyourMacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.

• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen

Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApplemenuandarrangeicons.

Page 209: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

192

9. Appendix

❽ PC Control Codes and Cable ConnectionPC Control Codes

Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H

POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H

INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A1H A9H

INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A6H AEH

INPUT SELECT BNC 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH

INPUT SELECT BNC(CV) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH

INPUT SELECT BNC(Y/C) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H

INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H

INPUT SELECT SLOT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H ABH B3H

PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H

PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H

NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.

Cable ConnectionCommunicationProtocol

Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bpsData length ��������������������������������������8 bitsParity �����������������������������������������������No parityStop bit ��������������������������������������������One bitX on/off ��������������������������������������������NoneCommunications procedure �������������Full duplex

NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.

PC Control Terminal (D-SUB 9P)

NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.

NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.

NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.

1 52 43

6 7 98

ToGNDofPC

ToRxDofPC

ToTxDofPC

ToRTSofPC

ToCTSofPC

Page 210: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

193

9. Appendix

❾ Troubleshooting Check ListBeforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsobyreferringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblemmoreefficiently.* Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.

Frequency of occurrence □ always □sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) □other(__________________)

Power□ No power (POWER indicator does not light blue)� See also “Status

Indicator (STATUS)”�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ No power even though you press and hold the POWER button�□ The main power switch is in the “ON (I)” position�

□ Shut down during operation�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO

POWER OFF] function)�□ [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]

function)�

Video and Audio□ No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the

projector�□ Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC

first, then start the PC�□ Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�

• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysturnstheexternaldisplayon or off.

□ No image (blue or black background, no display)�□ Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�□ Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�□ Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input terminal□ A message appears on the screen�

(_____________________________________________)□ The source connected to the projector is active and available�□ Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or

the contrast�□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the

projector�□ Image is too dark�

□ Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast�

□ Image is distorted�□ Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you

carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�

□ Parts of the image are lost�□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST

button�□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�□ Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�

□ Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal�

□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector�

□ Some pixels are lost�□ Image is flickering�

□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�

□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�

□ Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�□ Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from

[HIGH] to [AUTO]�□ Image appears blurry or out of focus�

□ Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�

□ Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�

Other□ Remote control does not work�

□ No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control�

□ Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls�

□ Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�

□ Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)□ [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in

the menu�□ Still unchanged even though you press and hold the SOURCE

button for a minimum of 10 seconds�

Page 211: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

194

9. Appendix

In the space below please describe your problem in detail.

Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Projector PC

Blu-rayplayer

Projector

Model number:Serial No�:Date of purchase:Light module operating time (hours):Eco Mode: □ OFF □ ONInformation on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHzVertical synch frequency [ ] HzSynch polarity H □ (+) □ (−) V □ (+) □ (−)Synch type □ Separate □ Composite □ Sync on Green

STATUS Indicator:Steady light □ Orange □ GreenFlashing light [ ] cycles

Remote control model number:

Installation environment

Screen size: inchScreen type: □ White matte □ Beads □ Polarization

□ Wide angle □ High contrastThrow distance: feet/inch/mOrientation: □ Ceiling mount □ DesktopPower outlet connection:□ Connected directly to wall outlet□ Connected to power cord extender or other (the

numberofconnectedequipment______________)□ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

ofconnectedequipment______________)

Computer

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Notebook PC □ / Desktop □

Native resolution:

Refresh rate:

Video adapter:

Other:

Videoequipment

VCR, Blu-ray player, Video camera, Video game or other

Manufacturer:

Model number:Signal cable

NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?Model number: Length: inch/m

Distribution amplifierModel number:

SwitcherModel number:

AdapterModel number:

Page 212: Projector PX803UL-WH/PX803UL-BK · If you touch the cooling fluid with your hand, rinse your hands well under running water. Installation • Do not place the projector in the following

©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2015 7N952341